JP6746168B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In the conventional gaming machines, gaming machines that can give a gaming privilege (prize ball, award medal, value data, etc.) according to the result of the game are general.

Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays information indicating a set value (theoretical value) of gaming machine performance on a display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-116898

However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the gaming machine performance is predetermined and the game advantage cannot be changed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the advantage of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a game control means for controlling the progress of a game and a game value grant control based on the satisfaction of a grant condition, and a payout control for a game value loan based on the satisfaction of a loan condition. The game control means includes control means and effect control means for performing effect control of a game based on control information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means is a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values. running and setting change means for controlling the initial processing means for performing an initial process of initializing the control state of based-out game to establishment of a predetermined condition at power, the variable display of symbols based on the establishment of starting conditions And the first control information is transmitted to the effect control means when the setting change state is started, and the second control information is transmitted to the effect control means when the setting change state is ended. , The third control information is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the initial process , the fourth control information is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols, and the variable display of the symbols And a transmission means for transmitting fifth control information to the effect control means upon completion of , the effect control means displays a setting change image on a predetermined display unit upon receipt of the first control information. Then, a plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the second control information, and a plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information, With the reception of the fourth control information, a plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed on the predetermined display unit, and with the reception of the fifth control information, a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols is stopped and displayed, and the second said plurality of performance symbol to be displayed along with the reception of the control information, the third same performance symbols der from said plurality of performance symbol to be displayed along with the reception of the control information is, in view of the setting changed images To the second control information is received, and then the plurality of productions to be stopped and displayed by receiving the fifth control information during the display of the plurality of production symbols started by receiving the fourth control information The symbols and the plurality of effect symbols which are not displayed normally while the setting change image is being displayed, cannot receive the second control information and the fourth control information, and then stop display by receiving the fifth control information. It is characterized in that it is possible to differ from and.

According to the present invention, it is possible to change the advantage of a game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of the lower part of a glass frame. It is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a main controller. It is a perspective view which shows the positional relationship of various elements which comprise a main controller. It is a figure showing an example of a block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the memory map of a main control part. It is a figure which shows the dump list of the memory area in a main control part. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game area and information area in a main control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving game states. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving game states. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special winning opening opening mode determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a game state setting table. It is a figure showing an example of various storage areas of a game work area. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initialization process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initialization timing of a main RAM, and the relationship of an initialization area. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure showing special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the abnormality determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the operation error determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game ball counting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance information calculation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure showing the display information on the information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a display of an information indicator. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a display of an information indicator. It is a figure which shows the example 3 of a display of an information indicator. It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a display of an information display. It is a figure which shows the example 5 of a display of an information indicator. It is a figure which shows the example 6 of a display of an information display. It is a figure which shows the example 7 of a display of an information display. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a payout control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process of a payout control part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main process of a payout control part. It is the figure which shows the main processing of the production control section. It is the figure which shows the timer interruption processing of the production control section. It is the figure which shows the command analysis processing of the production control section. It is the figure which shows the deformation example of the main processing of the production control section. It is a figure which shows the main processing of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interruption process of a general control part, and the V blank interruption process of a general control part. It is a figure which shows the adjustment mode switching process of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows a changeover switch and an adjustment mode selection table. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure centering on an audio|voice control part. It is a figure which shows the structure of the audio|voice channel of an audio|voice control part. It is a figure which shows the audio|voice management table stored in the audio|voice ROM. It is a figure which shows the volume adjustment process of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case volume adjustment is performed in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case the volume adjustment is performed during change production. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) in case a setting is changed. It is a diagram showing a specific example (effect example) when the setting is changed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) when RWM clear is performed. It is a diagram showing a specific example (effect example) when the RWM clear is performed. It is a diagram showing a specific example (operation example) when the control state of the game is restored. It is a diagram showing a specific example (effect example) when the control state of the game is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) when setting confirmation is performed. It is a diagram showing a specific example (effect example) when the setting confirmation is performed.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Structure of game machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 2 is an example of a partial perspective view of the gaming machine 1 in the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) as a game value flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to a lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail or a stopper, etc.) to an island facility of a game store. ) Fixed through.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper portion of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 including a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95, which will be described later, are paid out based on the establishment of a grant condition. An upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as a game ball, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing a game ball that has not fully entered the upper plate 11 and has flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later, and a game A launching operation device 13 that can be operated to launch a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two places on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect) and the like to produce a sound (music, voice). It is like this. In addition, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and produce an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction of the light of each lamp (LED) and the emission color. In addition, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when a payout abnormality occurs in which the gaming frame cannot be paid out from the glass frame 4 or the payout device 95 is paid out.

The upper plate 11 is such that the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game balls is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the firing operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, in the central front side portion of the upper plate 11, an effect button device 16 and a select button device 18 (FIG. 1 or FIG. 2) that function as an input device for performing a determination operation and a selection operation related to various effects described later. (See) are provided side by side.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting an operation of the effect button 17, and an effect button 17 in a normal state and a normal state. A button drive motor 17b for changing to a protruding state positioned above the button drive motor, a button vibration motor 17c for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 17 vibrates in a predetermined mode, and A button light emitting LED 17d (light emitting unit) for changing the effect button 17 between a light extinction state and a light emitting state of emitting light in a predetermined mode is provided, and the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. ..

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 6) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

Further, a lending operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money is provided on the right side of the upper plate 11. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the gaming ball, When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from a ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) for receiving the game balls that cannot fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding them to the lower plate 12 is formed. Further, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 6) for detecting that the game balls are full in the lower plate 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower plate 12 is full. The payout of gaming balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped while the game is being played.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 6) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 6) including a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is actuated to feed the game balls one by one.

On the game board mounting frame 3, a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 6) for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 6) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an opening at the front in the approximate center of the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board attachment portion 25, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 through the opening are provided behind the game machine 1. Face.

The launching device 26 is a launching member for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b for driving the launching member (see FIG. 6), and a launching uphill from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping the game ball at the launch position, which is the inclined lower end of the launch rail, are provided. When the game ball sent by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 6) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the action of the launching member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the key hole is formed is exposed on the front surface side of the glass frame 4. Then, when the exclusive key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released, and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down to a portion surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. Is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a is formed. Further, at the most downstream portion of the game area 5a, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing down game balls to the outside of the game area (collection portion of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed.

A frame-shaped ornamental frame 40 that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior, which is a so-called center case, is provided in the approximate center of the game region 5a, and the ornamental frame 40 causes the game region 5a to be launched with a first firing force. It is divided into a left-side game area in which the played game balls flow down, and a right-side game area in which the game balls launched by a second launching force stronger than the first launching force flow down, and a left-side game area and a right-side game area Communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

On the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the interior of the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage section 42 that rolls down the game balls introduced into the table and flows down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, there are provided three general winning openings 43 in which game balls can always win (balls), and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, there are games. One general winning opening 43 is provided so that the ball can always win (win). When the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 6) detects the gaming balls that have won (winning) the general winning opening 43 (the grant condition is satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of gaming balls are generated. The payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a game value).

Below the stage section 42, a first starting opening 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) in which game balls can always win (winning) is provided, and the first starting opening 45 wins (wins). When the game ball played is detected by the first starting opening detection switch 45a (see FIG. 6) (the grant condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are paid out to the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Are paid out to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (giving a game value). In addition, the right to perform the special game determination (big hit determination) whether to execute the special game (here, the big hit game) is granted (the special figure determination information described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and to the lower right of the first starting opening 45, it is impossible to win a game ball (win) on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition (that is, winning in a hit determination described later). There is provided a variable starter 46 capable of converting a difficult closed state into a game ball winning state or an easy open state.

The variable starting portion 46 becomes a flow path of the game ball by the upper surface inclining downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1), and is movable directly in the front-back direction, and directly below the movable member 48. A second starting opening 47 opening upward (starting winning area of the second special symbol) and a second starting opening detection switch 47a (FIG. 6) for detecting a game ball winning (ball entering) in the second starting opening 47. And the movable member 48 is moved forward (the winning restriction position) to convert the second starting port 47 to the closed state, and the movable member 48 is moved backward (the winning allowable position). A second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 6) for converting the second starting opening 47 into the open state is provided.

Then, a game ball is won in the second starting port 47 that has been opened during the auxiliary game, which will be described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 6) (the giving condition is satisfied). Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (giving a game value). In addition, a right to perform a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (here, a jackpot game) is given (special figure determination information described later is stored).

In the right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, a universal figure gate 44 (universal figure starting area) through which game balls can always pass is provided. When the game ball that has passed through the universal gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize ball is given, but the right to make an auxiliary game determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary game is given. It is given (stored general-universal-drawing determination information described later).

Downstream of the universal gate 44, it is possible or easy to open a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a big jackpot is won in the special game determination). A first variable winning portion 49 that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning portion 49 becomes a flow path of the game ball by the upper surface being inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in the drawing), and a first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 movable in the front-rear direction, The first big winning opening 50 (winning area) which opens directly below the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, and the first big winning which detects a game ball that has won (winning) the first big winning opening By moving the mouth detection switch 50a and the first special winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the front (the winning restriction position), the first special winning opening 50 is converted to the closed state, and at the same time, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51. A first special winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 6) for converting the first special winning opening 50 to the open state by moving the arrow toward the rear (winning allowance position) is provided.

When the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves from the winning restriction position to the winning possible position during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 50 is converted into an open state, and the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 is opened. The game balls that have flowed down or the game balls that have reached the first special winning opening 50 win the first big winning opening 50. Then, when the game balls that have won the first special winning opening 50 are detected by the first special winning opening detection switch 50a (the grant condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are paid out. From the device 95 (see FIG. 3), the prize balls (giving a game value) are paid out to the upper plate 11.

Downstream of the first variable winning portion 49, it is possible or easy to win a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a big hit is won in the special game determination). A second variable winning portion 52 that can be converted to a different open state is provided.

The second variable winning portion 52 serves as a flow path for a game ball when the upper surface inclines downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure), and also has a second large winning opening opening/closing member 54 that is movable in the front-back direction. The second big winning opening 53 (winning area) that opens directly below the second big winning opening opening/closing member 54, and the second big winning that detects the game balls that have won (winning) the second big winning opening By moving the mouth detection switch 53a and the second special winning opening opening/closing member 54 toward the front (the winning restriction position), the second special winning opening 53 is converted to a closed state, and the second special winning opening opening/closing member 54 is also moved. A second special winning opening opening/closing solenoid 54b (see FIG. 6) is provided for converting the second special winning opening 53 to an open state by moving to the rear (winning allowance position).

When the second special winning opening opening/closing member 54 moves from the winning restriction position to the winning allowable position during the big hit game, the second special winning opening 53 is converted into an open state, and the upper surface of the second special winning opening opening/closing member 54 is opened. The game balls that have flowed down and the game balls that have reached the second special winning opening 53 win the second special winning opening 53. Then, when the game balls that have won the second special winning opening 53 are detected by the second special winning opening detection switch 53a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are provided to the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Are paid out to the upper plate 11 as prize balls.

Then, the game ball shot to the left game area flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40 as it is, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. One of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45 will be won, or it will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning opening 43, the universal figure gate 44, the first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning opening 50) and the second variable winning portion 52 (second big winning opening 53) provided in the right game area are won ( It does not pass).

In addition, the game ball shot to the right-side game area is a general winning opening 43, a universal figure gate 44, a variable starting portion 46 (second starting opening 47), a first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning opening 50), Either the second variable winning portion 52 (the second big winning opening 53) is won, or it flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, there is no winning in the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, game balls winning the first big winning opening 50 and a second big winning opening 53, and an out opening 39. An out ball flow path is provided which receives an out ball consisting of an inflowing game ball and flows down while collecting it, and an out ball detection switch 57a (see FIG. 6) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out ball detection switch 57a flowing down the out ball flow path is discharged to the outside (island facility) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the game area 5a, a symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61 and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol hold display device 63, a second special symbol hold device. A holding display device including a display 64 and a normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) described below is executed, and a jackpot game (special game described below ) A right-handed indicator 67 is provided for urging the player to shoot a game ball toward the right-hand side game area during the middle or high probability game state.

The first special symbol display device 60 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the special game determination (the jackpot determination of the first special symbol) performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting opening 45. The variable display device, the second special symbol display device 61, the result of the special game determination (big jackpot determination of the second special symbol) performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball to the second starting opening 47 (Notification) is a variable display, the normal symbol display 62, the result of the auxiliary game determination (normal symbol hit determination) performed based on the passage (entering) of the game ball to the universal gate 44 (ball entry) It is a variable display for displaying (notifying).

Special game determination, special game determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, special symbol determination random number value, reach determination when the game ball wins (ball) to the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47 It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on the acquired random number value, random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.).

Then, when the special game determination is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 60, and the determination result is shown after a lapse of a predetermined time. (Notification) The stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Further, when the special game determination is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 47, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the determination result is shown after a predetermined time has elapsed. (Notification) The stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices in the variable display of each special symbol blink at a predetermined interval or order. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (a big hit mode, a small hit mode, a lost mode) showing the result of the special game determination.

In the present embodiment, "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute a big hit game (special game) in the special game determination. The "big hit game" is a round game in which the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 50 and the second special winning opening 53) are converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner a predetermined number of times with an interval ( For example, it refers to a game state advantageous for a player who easily wins a prize ball when the player plays it twice or 16 times.

In addition, although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening (the first winning opening 50, the second winning opening 53) in each round game are predetermined, before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time. Even if a predetermined number of game balls (eg, 9) are won (balls) in the special winning opening, one round game is finished. In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Further, the "small hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute the small hit game (special game) in the special game determination. The "small hit game" means that the player who plays the game in which the big winning opening (the second big winning opening 53) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a more disadvantageous manner than the big hitting game can easily win the prize ball. A game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in the small hitting game is predetermined, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won in the big winning opening (ball entering). ) Then the small hit game ends. Unlike the big hit game, the game state does not change (due to) the execution of the small hit game.

Auxiliary game determination is, based on the passage (entering) of the game ball to the universal figure gate 44, general figure determination information (a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for ordinary symbol determination, a random number value for general pattern variation pattern, etc.) It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game based on the acquired universal figure determination information. In addition, when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the determination result is shown (notified) The normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of the normal symbols, the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in an order. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or lost mode) showing the result of the auxiliary game determination.

In the present embodiment, "winning" means a state in which it is decided to execute an auxiliary game (hit game) in the auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" means a game state in which the second starting opening 47 is opened in a predetermined mode.

In addition, the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (hit game) are predetermined, but even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 is opened. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are won (ball), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. That is, the "auxiliary game" is in a game state in which the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is easily established. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (win games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the number of special symbol determination information (first special symbol reserved) stored when the game ball wins (ball entry) in the first starting opening 45 Is for displaying the number of the first special figure reservation, which is lit or blinks in a mode showing the number of the first special figure reservation. It should be noted that the maximum number of the first special figure reservations is stored at four, but the number may be smaller or larger than four.

The second special symbol reservation display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the number of special symbol determination information (second special symbol reservation) stored when the game ball wins (ball) to the second starting opening 47 Is for displaying the number of second special figure reservations, and is lit or blinking in a mode showing the number of second special figure reservations. It should be noted that although the maximum number of the second special figure reservations is stored at four, the number may be smaller or larger than four, or the second special figure reservation may not be stored. Good.

The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is made up of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of ordinary figure hold information which is the number of ordinary figure determination information (universal figure hold) stored when the game ball wins (passes) the ordinary figure gate 44. Is displayed, and is lit or blinks in a mode that indicates the number of universal figures reserved. It should be noted that although the maximum of four universal figure reservations are stored, the number of general figure reservations may be smaller or larger than four, or the general figure reservation may not be stored.

The first special symbol display device 60 and/or the second special symbol display device 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the special symbol jackpot lottery, "3" or "7" is displayed as a stop, and if it is lost, "-" is displayed as a stop. It is preferable to repeat turning off and "-".

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), which is a liquid crystal display, is provided in the interior of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40. The first image display device 70 is a lower part of the effect space 40a and displays the first image. In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), which is a liquid crystal display whose size and display area are smaller than those of the first image display device 70, is provided, and above the effect space 40a. The movable effect device 73 for executing the action effect is provided, and the variation notification LED 59 for informing the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol is provided on the right part of the effect space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting effect that is performed during non-execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the jackpot game are being executed. There is a jackpot production etc.

Further, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) configured by a solenoid, a motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing the variable effect. Has become.

Specifically, the standby position (first position) located closer to the end (lower side) of the first image display device 70 and the effect position (second position) closer to the center (upper) of the first image display device 70. By moving (up and down) in the up and down direction with respect to the position, the moving effect is performed. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or may be configured to perform the moving effect by operating the effect button 17.

In the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) and execution of variable effect The mode display area etc. which show the production mode concerning are formed.

The effect symbol 70a is, for example, composed of symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "8", and variable display of special symbols executed by the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61. The variable display is started corresponding to the start of, and the stop display is performed corresponding to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is adapted to be stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (miss mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the special game determination (big hit determination). The big hit mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777", and the lost mode is other modes.

The form of the variable display of the effect design 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, or may be switched or rotated (rotated) on the spot. Good.

Further, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect design 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display according to the result of the special game determination. By being displayed on the device 71, the player's expectation for the jackpot game (special game) being executed is increased.

In the first image display device 70, a first hold icon display area 70C (first hold area) for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold display) corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1). ), or a second hold icon display area 70D (second hold area) for displaying a second hold icon (second hold display) of a number corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2), and the special figure hold The icon display area 70E (digestion hold area) for displaying the icon (digestion hold display) indicating that the variation effect executed by subtracting the number is being formed is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70C includes a first display portion 70C1 (first area), a second display portion 70C2 (second area), and a third display portion 70C3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70E. , 4th display part 70C4 (4th area), and the 1st reservation of the number corresponding to the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) is divided into the 1st display part 70C1-the 4th display part 70C4. The icon is displayed.

Specifically, the first display unit 70C1 displays the first holding icon indicating the first holding memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70C2 displays the second holding icon. The first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third in the third display unit 70C3. The first hold icon indicating the hold storage is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70C4 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D includes a first display portion 70D1 (first area), a second display portion 70D2 (second area), a third display portion 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display portion 70D4 (from the left side). The fourth display area 70D1 to the fourth display area 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays the second hold icon. The second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the third display unit 70D3 is the third in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The second hold icon indicating the hold storage is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays the second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70E is formed immediately above the pedestal image for distinction from the first hold icon display area 70C and the second hold icon display area 70D, and is placed on or floats on the pedestal image. The icon is displayed as follows.

Specifically, the first hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 70C along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect pattern 70a) are directed toward the icon display area 70E one by one. Moving (shifting), the first holding icon displayed on the first display unit 70C1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70E, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) At the end of, the icon disappears (erases).

In addition, the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D along with the start of the variable display of the second special design (effect design 70a) moves one by one toward the icon display area 70E (shift). ), the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70E, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (erases). In addition, you may make the said icon disappear in the middle of the variable display of a special design (effect design 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed on the first image display device 70, but the effect symbol may be variably displayed on the second image display device 71. Both the image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 may perform variable display of the effect symbols 70a.

The movable effect device 73 includes an operable first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b, and the first movable member 73a and the first movable member 73a during execution of variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined action, it is possible to execute the action effect. Further, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined mode during execution of the action effect. ..

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located closer to the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 and closer to the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. It is configured to move (raise and descend) with respect to the positioned effect position (second position). The second movable member 73b is configured to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position that retracts from the front of the first movable member 73a. ..

The variation notification LED 59 is configured by a full-color LED, and is provided with a first variation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second variation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first variation notification LED 59a starts a color change (variation display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and a color corresponding to the stop of the variation display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change (variable display of the first special symbol), whether or not the first special symbol is variably displayed is notified. The second variation notification LED 59b starts a color change (variable display of the second special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a color corresponding to the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change (variable display of the second special symbol), whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed is notified.

The result of the variable display (special game determination) of the first special symbol is notified by the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol, and the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol is notified. The result of the variable display (special game range) of the second special symbol may be notified by. Moreover, while notifying the result of the variable display (special game determination) of the first special symbol only by the first special symbol stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol only by the second special symbol stopped and displayed (special game determination ) Results may be reported.

Further, instead of performing the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first variation notification LED 59a or the second variation notification LED 59b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed on the first image display device 70 or the first special symbol. The two-image display device 71 may be variably displayed.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out the game balls based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition (prize ball, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility or the like. In response to a payout control command from the main control device 110A, which contains a game ball storage unit 96 that stores the balls and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control board 110 that totally controls the progress of the game, And a payout control device 120A that includes a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 95, and an effect control device 130A that includes an effect control board 130 that controls the effect according to an effect control command from the main control board 110. , A power supply device 160A having a built-in power supply board 160 for supplying a power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information for outputting game information (game signals) to the outside of a game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer) An output terminal board 90 and the like are provided.

In addition, an opening/closing door-type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes in the left and right directions on the left and right other sides around a rotation axis set on the left and right sides so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire effect control device from the rear. In the production control device 130A, the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, the image display device, and various illumination devices (frame illumination device 10, panel illumination device 74). A changeover switch 22 is provided for changing over the adjustment mode relating to the adjustment of the light amount.

(Structure of main controller)
Next, the configuration of the main controller 110A that controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of main controller 110A.

The main controller 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin board case for housing the main control board 110 therein, and a sealing seal for restricting opening of the board case. 104 and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the substrate case so as to cover the sealing seal 104.

On the front side of the main control board 110, the contents stored in the main control unit 110m, which is a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m, are cleared or at the stage of the degree of advantage of the game (of the game. RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, which changes the degree of advantage), and a signal for shifting the set value to a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed by an operation using the setting key A setting key switch 112a for inputting, and an information display 113 for displaying performance information and set values by which the actual performance of the gaming machine can be grasped are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base value described later) described later, and is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP. .. Then, an identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on the 7-segment displays 113a and 113b, and the set value and the numerical value of the performance information are indicated by the 7-segment displays 113c and 113d. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information is configured.

The board case includes a lower chamber-shaped lower case member 101 whose opening is opposed to the rear surface side of the main control board 110, and a recessed chamber-shaped upper case member 102 whose opening is opposed to the surface side of the main control board 110. By including the lower case member 101 and the upper case member 102 in a closed state, an accommodation space for accommodating the main control board 110 is formed.

At an end of the board case, a sealing portion for sealing the board case with the lower case member 101 and the upper case member 102 in a state where the main control board 110 is accommodated is closed, and the lower case member 101. A sticking portion for sticking the seal sticker 104 is provided across the upper case member 102.

The sealing portion is composed of a lower fixed portion 101a provided on the lower case member 101 and an upper fixed portion 102a provided on the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower fixed portion 101a. Then, the board case is sealed by screwing a one-way screw from the upper fixing portion 102a to the lower fixing portion 101a, the rotation of which is restricted in the removal direction.

The sticking part includes a lower sticking part 101b provided on the lower case member 101 and an upper sticking part 102b provided on the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower sticking part 101b. The board case is sealed by sticking the seal sticker 104 across the lower sticking portion 101b and the upper sticking portion 102b.

The seal cover member 105 is formed in a recessed chamber shape with one side open. Then, the seal sticker 104 is protected by attaching it to the substrate case so as to include the sticking part in which the seal sticker 104 is stuck.

On the upper surface of the upper case member 102, a model name sticker 106 on which the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is printed and a management number sticker 107 on which the management number of the main control board 110 is printed are arranged side by side. It is attached in the state. An operation member 108 for pressing (turning on) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. Then, when the operation member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

Further, at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a, an insertion portion 112 for inserting the setting key into the key hole of the setting key switch 112a is formed. The insertion portion 112 has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a tubular portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. doing. Then, when the setting key is inserted into the key hole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned on so that the setting key cannot be removed from the key hole, and is turned to the left. When it is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key comes out of the keyhole.

(Position relation of various elements)
Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the positional relationship of various elements that constitute main controller 110A will be described. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the positional relationship of various elements that constitute main controller 110A.

The model name seal 106 and the management number seal 107 are arranged above and below the step portion formed in the lower portion of the upper case member 102 in the left-right direction, and arranged side by side in the vicinity of the center of the upper case member 102 in the lateral direction. It is attached as. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the print contents.

The main control unit 110m, which is a one-chip microcomputer, is located in the center of the main control board 110 on the upper side and at a position shifted upward so as not to overlap with the model name seal 106 and the management number seal 107. It is mounted with the printing surface on which the product name etc. are printed facing up. Therefore, the main controller 110m can easily check the printed surface from the upper side of the substrate case without the visual confirmation being restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107.

The information display 113 is mounted on the right side of the upper side of the main control board 110 and laterally side-by-side in a position shifted rightward and upward so as not to overlap the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107 in the front and back. Has been done. Therefore, the information display 113 is not restricted in visibility (shielded) by the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107, and the display contents can be easily confirmed.

The seal sticker 104 is such that the portion stuck to the upper surface (front surface) of the sticking portion formed by the upper sticking portion 102b is closer to the main control board 110 than the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107 (the upper surface of the upper case member 102). , Between the upper surface of the information display 113), and the portion attached to the lower surface (bottom surface) of the attaching portion formed by the lower attaching portion 101b is located below (back side) the information indicator 113. doing.

It should be noted that as the information display 113, a performance display unit in which a circuit section including four 7-segment displays and a board is unitized may be mounted on the main control board. Even in that case, it is desirable that the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107 are arranged so as not to overlap with each other so that the visibility is not restricted (shielded).

Further, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 is mounted on a dedicated board. The main control board 110 may be mounted and board-to-board connected to the main control board 110 so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110.

Further, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but is provided on the power supply board 160 at a position where the player cannot operate, It may be provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 or on the back side of the glass frame 4. Even in this case, the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a may be input to the main controller 110m.

Further, because the signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value is input by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or as a position where the player cannot operate the power supply board. It may be provided on 160, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back side of the glass frame 4.

Further, instead of displaying both the performance information and the set value on the information display 113, another display is executed on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board contained in the board case of the main control board 110, and The performance information may be displayed on one of the display units and the set value may be displayed on the other display unit.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

As the control configuration of the present embodiment, a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on the receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. Board 120, production control board 130 for controlling the production related to the game based on reception of production control command from main control board 110, and power supply board for supplying power to main control board 110, payout control board 120 and production control board 130 It is equipped with 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received bidirectionally, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is performed from the main control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be transmitted to the substrate 130 in only one direction.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer that includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port. It is equipped with 110m.

A general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and a first large opening are provided at the input/output ports of the main controller 110m. Winning hole detection switch 50a, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second big winning opening detecting switch 53a, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 54b, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a, first 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator 63, second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, number of rounds indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information indicator 113, payout control board 120 and effect control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing relating to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. This enables control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoid, display, etc.), and transmission/reception of various control commands. Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launching device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a for performing arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

To the input/output port of the payout control unit 121, an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 95, and a payout ball from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that the game balls are stored in the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage unit 96 is connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing relating to payout of gaming balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. Thereby, the control process for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control substrate 110, the control process for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic process to the main control substrate 110, and the like. To do.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like, which are not shown.
The ball feed solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input/output port of the firing control unit 122.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b are allowed to be energized to fire. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is changed by the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven, and the firing solenoid is controlled to have a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to shoot game balls (99.9/minute).

The effect control board 130 controls the effect control unit 130m that comprehensively controls the progress of the effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the image display based on the effect control command received from the effect control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing of audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light emitting members (LEDs and the like) and various drive sources (motors and the like) based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m. Equipped with.

The effect control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs the operation related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, according to the control process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, the control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and the detection signal from various input devices (detection switch or the like). Control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting device, motor, etc.).

In response to the command from the effect control unit 130m, the display control unit 140 controls to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, or causes the voice output device 9 to output a predetermined voice. And control to output sound.

The display control unit 140 controls the display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141 and the overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m. An image control unit 145 that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data and the like, and a voice output based on reception of a voice control command from the overall control unit 141. A voice control unit 148 for controlling the device 9 and a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored are provided.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that is a work area for arithmetic processing, and an image control unit 145 and an audio control unit 148 that are connected. It has an output port.

The general CPU 141a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. Accordingly, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command to the display control unit 140, a voice output device. Control processing for generating a voice control command instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 is performed.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and the frame lighting device 10, button drive motor 17b, and button vibration motor. 17c, a button light emitting LED 17d, and an input/output port.

The frame lighting device 10, the button drive motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c, the button light emitting LED 17d, the movable effect device 73, and the panel lighting device 74 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp control unit 150.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. Thereby, control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the button drive motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c, the button light emitting LED 17d, the movable effect device 73, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and supplies the main power supply to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Supply to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to a power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in power supply voltage (power outage). A disconnection detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 when the power is cut off (power failure) are provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power supply is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. Even when the power switch is in the OFF state, the backup power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control unit 130m is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. When the power supply voltage becomes higher than the predetermined value during the output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and when the power is cut off (power failure), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is stored in the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and the effect control. It is supplied to the sub RAM 130c of the unit 130m. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the sub RAM 130c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after recovery from the power cut (power failure). Can be restored.

Although the payout control board 120 is not supplied with backup power, the payout control board 120 may be supplied with backup power so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure). ..

Further, although the backup power is supplied to the effect control unit 130m, when it is not necessary to retain the storage content of the sub RAM 130c at the time of power interruption (power failure), the backup power is supplied to the effect control unit 130m. It may not be supplied.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, a game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "low-probability game state" and a "high-probability game state" as states related to special game determination (big hit determination), and "non-time saving game" as a state related to the movable member 48 of the second starting opening 47. It has a "state" and a "time saving game state". Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) "Low probability non-time saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and a non-time saving game state,
(2) "Low probability time-short game state", which is a low-probability game state and a time-short game state,
(3) "High-probability time-short game state", which is a high-probability game state and a time-short game state, is provided.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state will be referred to as "normal gaming state" in the present embodiment. Also, the gaming state during the jackpot game is also set to the "low-probability non-time saving game state", but the gaming state is different from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "low-probability game state" is, for example, a stage of the degree of advantage of the game (when the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) is "1", the first start opening 45 or the second start In a special game determination (big hit determination) performed on the condition that a game ball enters the mouth 47, the winning probability of the big hit is about 1/300, which is a low game state.

On the other hand, the "high-probability game state" means that when the setting value is "1", the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high value of about 1/60, which is higher than that of the low-probability game state. A game state that is advantageous to. The transition from the low-probability game state to the high-probability game state is performed after the jackpot game is over.

Further, in the "non-time saving game state", in the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the universal gate 44, the winning probability per hit is set as low as 1/16, It means a game state in which the average time of variable display of symbols is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting opening 47 when winning is set to 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that the winning probability of winning is set as high as 15/16, the average time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and the winning case is won. By setting the opening time of the 2 start port 47 to 5 seconds, the game state is advantageous for the player in which the consumption of the game ball is suppressed as compared with the non-time saving game state. The transition from the non-time saving game state to the time saving game state is performed after the jackpot game is over.

It should be noted that the "time saving game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "non-time saving game state" in terms of the average variation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting opening 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery. Alternatively, only one of the average variation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47 and the winning probability of the winning lottery may be set to be advantageous.

Also, the winning probability in the auxiliary game determination in the non-time saving game state is the same without changing by the set value, but it can be changed by the setting value so that the larger the setting value becomes, the more advantageous the winning probability becomes. Good. Also, the winning probability in the auxiliary game determination in the time saving game state is the same without changing according to the set value, but it may be changed depending on the setting value so that the larger the setting value becomes, the more advantageous the winning probability becomes. Good.

(Memory map of main controller)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area including the main ROM 110b and the main RAM 110c of the main controller 110m.

The memory area of the main controller 110m includes a memory area (8000H to FFFFH) assigned to the main ROM 110b and a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) assigned to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b is a game ROM area (8000H to 9FFFH) in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area (A000H in which programs and data relating to performance display of the gaming machine are stored. ~A52EH), an unused area of 16 bytes or more (A52FH to A6FFH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and a ROM comment area (A700H ~) where data such as program title and version is stored. A77FH), a vector table area (A780H to A7A7H) in which a start address of a timer interrupt process described later is set, and an HW parameter area (A7A8H to A7A8H to A7FFFH) are arranged in order.

The game ROM area is a game program area (8000H to 8BDCH) in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, and a first unused area (8BDDH to 8FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ), a game data area (9000H to 9976H) in which data related to the progress of the game is stored, and a second unused area (9977H to 9FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored in order. It is arranged.

The information ROM area is an information program area (A000H to A437H) in which a program related to the performance of the gaming machine is stored, and an unused area (A438H to A47FH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. Then, the information data area (A480H to A52EH) in which the data related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored is sequentially arranged.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c is a game RWM area (0000H to 018FH) used as a work (work area) when the game program is executed, and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed. (0190H to 01FFH) are arranged in order.

The game RWM area includes a game work area (0000H to 0128H) used as a work by the game program, a first unused area (0129H to 0171H) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, A game stack area (0172H to 017FH) for temporarily saving the data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area (0180H to 018FH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ) Are arranged in order.

In the game work area, a set value area for storing a set value, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and changes depending on the progress of the game. A game data area for storing game data is arranged in order.

The information RWM area includes an information work area (0190H to 01E8H) used as a work by the information program, an unused area (01E9H to 01EAH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and an information program. The information stack areas (01EBH to 01FFH) for temporarily saving the data being processed are sequentially arranged.

In the work area for information, a performance information area for storing information on the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information on various error determinations are sequentially arranged.

(Dump list of RWM area)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a dump list when the contents of the memory area of the main controller 110m are output to a printer or a display. In FIG. 8, a plurality of areas surrounded by squares are unused areas in which “0” is stored.

In the game RWM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 73 bytes or more between the game work area (0000H to 0128H) and the game stack area (0172H to 017FH). .. Therefore, a boundary line that separates the game work area and the game stack area is formed by the unused area, and the game work area and the game stack area can be easily separated in the debugging work or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

In the RWM area for information, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set for 2 bytes between the work area for information (0190H to 01E8H) and the stack area for information (01EBH to 01FFH). Therefore, a boundary that separates the information work area and the information stack area is formed by the unused area, and the information work area and the information stack area can be easily identified in the debugging work or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to (recognize).

Further, an unused area in which "0" is stored after the game stack area (0172H to 017FH) is set from 1680H, which is a multiple of 16, to 16 bytes, and after this unused area, an information work area ( (0190H to 01E8H) is set from 0190H which is a multiple of 16. Therefore, a boundary line that separates the game RWM area and the information RWM area is formed by the unused area, so that the game RWM area and the information RWM area can be easily provided in the debugging operation or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

In the game ROM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set for 1059 bytes between the game program area (8000H to 8BDCH) and the game data area (9000H to 9976H). Therefore, a boundary line that separates the game program area and the game data area is formed by the unused area, and the game program area and the game data area can be easily separated in the debugging operation or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

In the information ROM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set for 72 bytes between the information program area (A000H to A437H) and the information data area (A480H to A52EH). Therefore, a boundary that separates the information program area and the information data area is formed by the unused area, and the information program area and the information data area can be easily identified in the debugging operation or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to (recognize).

Further, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set to 1673 bytes after the game data area (9000H to 9976H), and the information program area is a multiple of 16 after this unused area. It is set. Therefore, a boundary line that separates the game ROM area and the information ROM area is formed by the unused area, so that the game ROM area and the information ROM area can be easily provided in the debugging operation or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

In the game ROM area and the information ROM area, an unused area of 16 bytes or more is provided between the program area and the data area, but the unused area may be 16 bytes or less, or the program area. It is not necessary to provide an unused area between the data area and the data area.

Also, although an unused area is provided at the end of the game ROM area, this unused area is not provided in the game ROM area, but is provided at the beginning of the information ROM area (before the information program area). An unused area may be provided, or between the game ROM area and the information ROM area (between the game data area and the information program area) so as not to belong to the game ROM area and the information ROM area. An unused area may be provided in the.

Also, in the game RWM area and the information RWM area, an unused area of a predetermined byte is provided between the work area and the stack area, but this unused area may be 16 bytes or more, or 16 bytes. Alternatively, the unused area may not be provided between the data area and the stack area.

Further, although an unused area is provided at the end of the gaming RWM area, this unused area is not provided in the gaming RWM area, but at the beginning of the information RWM area (before the information work area). An unused area may be provided, or between the gaming RWM area and the information RWM area (between the gaming stack area and the information work area) so as not to belong to the gaming RWM area and the information RWM area. An unused area may be provided in the.

(Relationship between game area and information area)
FIG. 9 shows a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on the game program, and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on the information program. It is a figure which shows the relationship with.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the main CPU 110a basically refers to the game data area when performing processing based on the game program, and uses the game RWM area as a work for the game. The contents of the RWM area are referred to and updated. Further, when performing the processing based on the information program, basically, the information data area is referred to, and the content of the information RWM area is referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but they can be referred to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the process based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the process based on the game program, and then the information program is called to call the information program. The flag register is restored from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is executed and the process based on the information program ends and the game program is restored.

In addition, immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are set in the information RWM area. The register for all the registers used in the game program immediately before the end of the information program is restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the gaming program when performing the processing based on the information program, and when the information program returns to the gaming program, a problem occurs. Will disappear.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 10A is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol that is referred to in the special game determination (jackpot determination) performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting opening 45, and FIG. 10(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, which is referred to in a special game determination (jackpot determination) performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting opening 47.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, the current setting value, the probability game state when performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot determination determination The results (big hit, small hit, lost) are associated with each other, and for reference, approximate winning probabilities in the case of “big hit” or “small hit” are described in the rightmost column.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, the current setting value, the probability game state when performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot determination random number value, jackpot determination The determination result (big hit, lost) is associated with each other, and the approximate probability in the case of “big hit” or “small hit” is described in the rightmost column for reference.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10(b), and the current setting value, the current probability game. Based on the state and the jackpot determination random number value, it is determined which of the “big hit”, the “small hit”, and the “miss”.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (a), when the setting value is "1" and the low probability game state, 200 of "100" to "299" The jackpot determination random number value is determined to be a "big hit", and when in the high-probability gaming state, 1000 big hit determination random number values of "100" to "1099" are determined to be a "big hit". In addition, regardless of whether it is the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state, the 200 big-hit determination random number values “2000” to “2199” are determined as “small hits”. Therefore, the big hit determination random number value other than the big hit or the small hit is determined to be “miss”.

As a feature of the jackpot determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot probability changes depending on the set value, but the jackpot probability does not change and is constant. By doing so, the advantage degree of the player is not extremely changed by the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The probability of being a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is five times the probability of being a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value), but it is a jackpot. The probability of being performed is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to any value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as the value is 10 times or less.

Further, the big hit determination table for the second special symbol, the small hit is not set, but the small hit may be set to have the same probability as the big hit determination table for the first special symbol, The small hit may be set so as to have a different probability from the big hit determination table for the first special symbol.

Further, the larger the set value, the more advantageous the player (the higher the jackpot probability). On the contrary, the smaller the set value, the more advantageous the player (the higher the jackpot probability). You can

Further, in all the setting values (1 to 4), the probability of being determined as a big hit may be the same in the low-probability game state and/or the high-probability game state, for example, two or three setting values ( 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big hit may be the same in the low-probability game state and/or the high-probability game state.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 11(a) is a special symbol determination table for a big hit that is referred to when determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is determined to be a big hit, and FIG. 11(b) is a special symbol when it is determined to be a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for loss that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the symbol, and FIG. 11C is for the small hit that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be a small hit. It is a special symbol determination table.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) to (c), the special symbol determination table has a type of special symbol for determining a stop symbol, a random number for special symbol determination, a determination result of special symbol determination, and this determination. The stop special figure data indicating the result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated with each other.

Special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols that execute the first jackpot game in which 16 rounds of the game are executed, and special symbols "02" and "05" are 16 rounds. It is a jackpot special symbol that executes the second jackpot game in which the game is executed, and "03" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the third jackpot game in which two round games are executed. Also, the special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. Also, the special symbol "20" is a small hit special symbol in which a small hit game is executed.

It should be noted that, although one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 11(a) to (c), the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol, and the special symbol based on the special symbol determination random value. The type, the stop special figure data, and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the types of big hit special symbols, the types of lost special symbols, and the types of small hit special symbols are the same without changing depending on the set values. By doing so, the game play is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. At least one of the big hit special symbol and the small hit special symbol may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratios of various jackpot special symbols, the selection ratios of various lost symbols, and the selection ratios of various small hit symbols are constant without changing according to set values. Is mentioned. By doing so, the advantage degree of the player is not extremely changed by the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special map variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 12 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving game state that is referred to when determining a variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving game state, and FIG. 13 is determination of a variation pattern of the special symbol in the time saving game state. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving game state which is sometimes referred to.

As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of special symbol to be displayed variably, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the determination result of the special symbol (stop special figure data), Reach judgment random number value, the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random number value, special figure fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and special symbol And the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify at least the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the variation time of the special symbol. Also, if the jackpot judgment result is a loss, the reach determination random number value is referenced, but in the case of a jackpot, the reach occurs except in special cases, so the reach determination random number value is not referenced. Has been done.

In the special figure variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, when the result of the jackpot determination is lost, the number of special figure reservations (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) increases. The variation pattern is determined so that the variation time of the special symbol becomes short.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, and determines the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), the reach determination random number value, the first special figure hold Number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), based on the random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, the special figure fluctuation pattern, the variation time of the special symbol and the special figure variation pattern designation command are determined, and the special figure A variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 is configured to determine the content (effect mode) of the variable effect based on the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation pattern designation command). In the rightmost column of each special figure pattern determination table shown in (1), the effect contents that can be executed in the variable effect are described for reference.

As the effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, “normal fluctuation”, “shortening fluctuation”, “long fluctuation”, and “super-shortening fluctuation” mean that the three effect symbols 70a are scattered at high speed. It means that it fluctuates and stops without reaching, the normal fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the long fluctuation, and the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation. The ultra-short change ends in a shorter change time than the short change.

In addition, “reach” means that the player is expected to execute a jackpot game such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a change. It means a variation mode. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit (a big hit result mode), the same effect symbol 70a is set to "7" in the left side region and the right side region. It temporarily stops and the remaining effect design 70a is changing in the central area.

The "temporary stop" means that the effect design 70a sways slightly or the effect design 70a is slightly deformed to make the player think that the effect design 70a is stopped (completely stopped). Not) refers to the embodiment.

Further, "normal reach" means a reach in which the same effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left side region and the right side region, and the other effect symbol 70a changes in the central region, and the reach with the lowest expectation of a big hit. Has become. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" is not a big hit, but the "normal reach" may be a big hit.

The "SP reach" is performed after the normal reach, and is a super reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach. For example, a special effect that makes the player expect that the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and the jackpot game is executed using almost the entire display area of the image display device. I am supposed to do it.

In addition, "SPSP reach" is a special reach that is performed after super reach and has a higher expectation of jackpots than super reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost all of the display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect than "SP reach".

In addition, the "full-reach reach" is a reach that is confirmed as a big hit. For example, when the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and are aligned, the speed fluctuates at a low speed, and a special effect is performed rather than "SPSP reach" using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

In addition, the "chance production" is a production that fuels whether it is a big hit or a small hit. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, but the reach state is not reached, and a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

The first feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving game state rather than the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined in the non-time saving game state. In this case, it is easier to determine a relatively short fluctuation time (the average fluctuation time becomes shorter). Therefore, the variation time of the special symbol can be changed between the non-time saving game state and the time saving game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the types of the special figure variation patterns to be determined are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the selection ratios of the special figure variation patterns are the same without changing according to the set values. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern may be changed for each set value, may be changed between an odd number setting and an even number setting, or may be a low setting (for example, 1-2). It may be changed depending on whether it is a high setting (for example, 3 to 4). In addition, a special special figure fluctuation pattern is provided for each set value, a special special figure fluctuation pattern is provided for one of the odd number setting and the even setting, and no special special figure fluctuation pattern is provided for the other. It is also possible to provide a special special figure fluctuation pattern for one of the low setting and the high setting and not provide a special special figure fluctuation pattern for the other.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 14(a) is referred to in the preliminary determination for determining the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It is a pre-determination table for the special symbol, FIG. 14 (b), before the variable display of the second special symbol, the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 47 is executed. It is a figure which shows the prior determination table for the 2nd special symbol referred in the prior determination.

As shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b), the pre-determination table has a game state, a determination result of a jackpot determination, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, and a special figure. The random number for fluctuation pattern determination, the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern as the determination result, and the starting mouth winning designation command indicating the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

In the pre-determination of the special symbol determination information, it is possible to determine which of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss" by the random number value for big hit determination, and the type of special symbol can be determined by the random value for special symbol determination Since it is possible to determine in advance the type of special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern to be executed by the reach judgment random value and the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, is it a big hit or a small hit from the starting mouth winning award designation command? Whether or not, it is possible to specify the special symbol type and the special symbol scheduled fluctuation pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14(a) or FIG. 14(b), and determines the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination disorder. Based on the numerical value, the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern and the starting mouth winning designation command are determined, and the starting mouth winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Big prize opening mode determination table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a special winning opening opening mode determination table for changing the state of the first special winning opening 50 or the second special winning opening 53 in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 15, the special winning opening release mode determination table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the type of big winning opening to be released, the maximum number of round games in the jackpot game, and the big winning opening in one round game To the maximum number of winnings, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the maximum number of times the big winning opening in each round game, and the opening of each round game The opening time of the special winning opening, the closing interval time for closing the special winning opening after the end of the round game, and the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game are associated with each other.

When the stop special figure data is "01", the main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game, and when the stop special figure data is "02", it is advantageous to the player over the first jackpot game. When the two jackpot games are executed and the stop special figure data is "03", the third jackpot game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second jackpot game is executed.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table for setting a game state after the jackpot game is over. In the game state setting table, special special symbol stop special data, winning state data indicating the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, a time saving game flag indicating that it is a time saving game state, and a time saving game state can be executed. A time saving number (J) indicating the number of variable displays, a high probability game flag indicating a high probability game state, and a high probability number (X) indicating the number of variable displays executable in the high probability game state. It is associated.

Here, the "winning state data" is information indicating the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning. The game state is composed of a combination of a non-time saving game state, a time saving game state, a low probability game state and a high probability game state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data, the time saving game flag, the time saving time (J), the high probability game flag, and the high probability. The probability number (X) is determined.

When the high-probability game state is set, 50,000 times may be set as the high-probability number (X), but in the high-probability game state, the winning probability of the jackpot is 1/60, Since the next big hit game is substantially determined, the second big hit game and the third big hit game are big hit games for which the next big hit game is fixed.

As a first feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16, even with the same stop special data, based on the winning state data (gaming state at the time of jackpot winning), setting of a time saving game flag and a number of times saving time (J) may be different in some cases.

Specifically, in the case of the stop special map data 01 (special symbol 01), "00H" indicating a low probability non-time saving game state is stored as the winning state data regarding the time saving game flag and the time saving number (J). If so, the time saving game flag is not set at the end of the jackpot game, and the time saving number (J) is set to 0 times. On the other hand, if "01H" indicating the low-probability short-time gaming state or "02H" indicating the high-probability short-time gaming state is stored as the winning state data, the time-shortening gaming flag is set at the end of the jackpot game. Set the number of hours saved (J) to 100 times. As a result, the number of times saved (J) can be changed depending on the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, and the player can be interested in the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that the types of the time saving game flag and the high-probability game flag that are set do not change depending on the set value and are the same. By doing so, the advantage degree of the player is not extremely changed by the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Various storage areas in the game work area)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the game work area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 17A is a special diagram in which special figure determination information obtained when a game ball wins (enters) the first starting opening 45 and/or the second starting opening 47 is stored. 17(b) is a diagram showing a determination information storage area, FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. FIG. 17D is a general-use figure determination information storage area in which general-use figure determination information acquired when passing is stored. FIG. 17D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit in the general-use figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the special figure determination information storage area is a first special figure determination information reservation storage in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 45 is stored. An area, a second special figure determination information holding storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 47 is stored, and special figure determination information in which variable display is being executed is stored. The first special figure determination information holding storage area and the second special figure determination information holding storage area are respectively divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section.

The first storage section, the second storage section, the third storage section, and the fourth storage section of the first special figure determination information holding storage area are the first display section 70C1 and the second display of the first holding icon display area 70C. It corresponds to the unit 70C2, the third display unit 70C3, and the fourth display unit 70C4, respectively. Further, the first storage section, the second storage section, the third storage section and the fourth storage section of the second special symbol reserved storage area are the first display section 70D1, the second display section 70D2 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, It corresponds to the third display unit 70D3 and the fourth display unit 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first special figure holding number (U1), and these special figure determinations are made. The number of first hold icons corresponding to the information is displayed on the first display section 70C1 to the fourth display section 70C4 of the first hold icon display area 70C. Further, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the second special figure determination information becomes the second special figure holding number (U2), which corresponds to these determination information. The number of hold icons is displayed on the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

The zeroth storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70E. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage section is displayed in the icon display area 70E.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), each storage unit is a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value, and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random value.

When the game ball is won (balled) in the first starting opening 45 and special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having a small number. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area and has the smallest number. The special figure determination information acquired is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, when the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure stored in the first storage section of the first special figure determination information holding storage area The determination information will be shifted and referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Will be referenced to perform.

As shown in FIG. 17( c ), the general figure determination information storage area and the general figure determination information storage area in which general figure determination information acquired based on the passage of a game ball to the general figure gate 44 is stored, and fluctuations. It is divided into a general figure determination information storage area in which the general figure determination information being displayed is stored, and the general figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section. The number of public figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the public figure determination information holding storage area is the number of public figure holdings.

As shown in FIG. 17(d), each storage unit stores a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value, and a normal symbol determination random number storage for storing a normal symbol determination random value. It is divided into an area and a general-use fluctuation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a random number value for general-use fluctuation pattern determination.

When the game ball passes through the public figure gate 44 and the general figure determination information is acquired, the general figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number in which the general figure determination information is not stored. The general figure determination information is stored.

The 0th storage unit which is the general figure determination information execution storage area shifts the general figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the general figure determination information holding storage area when the condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbols is satisfied. It is usually referred to for executing variable display of symbols.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart. It should be noted that in the following description, a process that is not specified to be a process based on an information program is a process based on a game program.

(Main processing of main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, a preparatory process for starting a game control, a setting change process for changing a set value based on a setting change operation, and a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c for initializing a RWM clear operation RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value based on the setting confirmation operation, and the like are performed. The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random number value and the reach determination random number value, and in step S51, the big hit determination initial random number value, the special symbol determination initial random number value, the hit determination initial random number value, Usually update the initial random number for symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating that a voltage drop has occurred in the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the supply power supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). It is determined whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the power is continuously input for a predetermined period, the process is moved to step S54 as if a complete power failure has occurred, and if the power is not supplied for a predetermined period, an instantaneous power failure in which the power supply voltage drops for a moment is possible. If so, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power shutdown command to notify the payout control board 120 that the power shutdown process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120, which has received the power-off instruction command, transmits a remaining payout number specification command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining payout amount designation command has been received. If the remaining payout amount designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the remaining payout amount designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting to receive the remaining payout amount designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 on the assumption that normal communication with the dispensing control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the payout amount in the payout counter set in the game RWM area. Specifically, when the remaining payout amount designation command is received, the remaining payout amount specified by the remaining payout amount designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout amount designation command is not received, the remaining payout amount designation command is saved. "0" is saved as the number of payouts. In addition, the remaining payout amount saved here is referred to in a payout control process of a timer interrupt, which will be described later, and a payout amount designating command corresponding to the remaining payout amount is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized and the operation of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the main RAM 110c and saves the checksum in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine the data abnormality of the RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area is backed up in a predetermined area of the game RWM area (power is restored), and prohibits RWM access in step S62. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initialization processing is performed, but with the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when the instantaneous power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed, so the game The machine does not perform an unintended operation, and reliability as a gaming machine can be ensured.

It should be noted that when a power failure (complete power failure) occurs, the checksum of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program and saved in the game RWM area, but the checksum is calculated by the information program. May be calculated and saved in the information RWM area.

(Main control board initial setting process)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S11, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts, in step S12 CPU initialization such as setting of internal registers is performed, and in step S13, start waiting processing for another board is performed. Specifically, it waits for one second until the payout control board 120 or the effect control board 130 is activated so that no command is missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designating command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launch of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S17. If the backup flag is not saved, the power is turned on for the first time and the process proceeds to step S18.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, one checksum (abnormality determination data) is calculated without distinguishing between the game RWM area and the information RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a, the RWM clear switch 111a, and the opening detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19, assuming that the mode is to be changed to the setting change mode, and if no setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) at the stage of the degree of advantage of the game is changed (updated) to initialize the game control state (for the game) Processing for initializing other than the set value area of the RWM area) is performed. The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area has no abnormality), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area has abnormality), the process proceeds to step S22. Transfer.

When the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting change flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the game RWM area. If the setting change flag does not exist, it is determined that the previous power cutoff did not occur during the setting change process, and the process proceeds to step S23. If the setting change flag exists, the previous power cutoff indicates the setting change process. The process moves to step S22 on the assumption that it has occurred inside. The setting change flag is saved in the game RWM area in the setting change processing described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a non-recoverable error process in step S22. Specifically, the error information indicating the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the non-recoverable error designation command indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and then the timer allocation is performed. After setting the interrupt prohibition that prohibits interruption and clearing the output port, a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the power supply Perform the process of waiting until the supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "non-recoverable error" is an error state in which the game control is not performed (the control of the game is not transferred), and cannot be released unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when a non-recoverable error occurs, even if the power switch is turned on without the setting change operation after the power switch provided on the power board 160 is turned off, the setting is not canceled and the setting is not canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. During a non-recoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Not recoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that a non-recoverable error has occurred. It is an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the setting." )) is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all turned on with a predetermined light emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or a non-recoverable error is generated from the audio output device 9. A non-recoverable error sound (“recoverable error” + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a and the open detection switch 31a are in the ON state. When the RWM clear operation is performed, the process is shifted to step S24 as the RWM clear mode is set, and when the RWM clear operation is not performed, the process is shifted to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clear process in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the game RWM region other than the set value region) is performed. The details of the RWM clear process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current game state (here, the low-probability non-time saving game state as the normal game state) and the payout control board 120 and It transmits to the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

"Power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the game control state has been initialized, and displays an initial screen (background image and initial effect design "123") at power-on on the image display device. Alternatively, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is initialized from the audio output device 9. A power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared”+buzzer sound) indicating that is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the open detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S27 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power is turned off. The processing moves to step S28.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S27. Specifically, processing for displaying the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 is performed. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is cut off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits, to the effect control board 130, a power supply restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like to be described later and executing the power supply recovery notification.

The "power recovery notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and a predetermined power recovery screen (image) showing that the power has been restored to the image display device is given. It is displayed for a period (for example, 30 seconds), the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and a sound is emitted. The output device 9 outputs a power recovery notification sound (buzzer sound) indicating that power is recovered (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S30, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc. described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure reservations, and the processing for displaying the first reservation icon or the second reservation icon on the image display device is performed.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S31, permits all interrupts in step S32, and ends the initial setting process this time. ..

As described above, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, the setting change, the RWM clear, and the setting confirmation cannot be easily performed. In addition, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set in the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set in the RWM clear operation and the setting confirmation operation, it is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of an event in which an action is likely to be performed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraud.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, the unrecoverable error process is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine performs an unexpected operation and is annoying to the game store or the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine without playing the game.

Also, if there is a setting change flag, that is, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change, even if the checksum is normal, irrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game. By doing so, the game does not proceed in the state where the setting value that the game store side does not intend is set, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, in the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, the opening detection switch 31a is included in the ON state, but the opening detection switch 31a is not included in the ON state. Good.

Further, when it is determined that there is no backup flag (that is, the power is turned on for the first time), and it is determined that the setting change operation has not been performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S20, the unrecoverable error process Is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the setting value area. At the same time, the information RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the information program, and the process may proceed to step S25.

If it is determined that the backup flag is present (power is restored) and the setting change operation is not performed, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20 thereafter, non-recoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program, and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. The information RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the information program, and the process may be moved to step S25.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-restoration designation command are transmitted including the information indicating the current game state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current game state You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum may be calculated by the information program. .. In this case, the calculated checksum may be saved in the information RWM area.

Also, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksums of all RWM areas are calculated, but the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area are calculated separately. If either one of the checksums is abnormal, the non-recoverable error process may be performed.

Further, the RWM area abnormality determination is performed by the checksum of the RWM area, but the RWM area abnormality determination is performed by the RWM parity adjustment data calculated so that the exclusive OR of the RWM areas becomes 0. You may do it.

Further, by not determining the presence/absence of the setting change flag, the non-recoverable error processing may not be performed even when the previous power failure occurs during the setting change.

(Main control board setting change process)
The setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a saves a setting change flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the game RWM area. The presence/absence of the setting change flag will be referred to in step S21 of the above-described initial setting process.

In step S19-2, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting change signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, processing for accepting the setting change signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer).

In step S19-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs the processing for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

The “setting change notification” means to display a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the image display device, or to set a predetermined value for the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 during the setting change. All the lights are emitted in the emission color (for example, white). Note that a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed may be output from the audio output device 9.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) the areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c (determination information area, game data area, etc.). As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipping of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the power is cut off is not inherited. Specifically, the game progress control is started from the low-probability non-time saving game state.

In step 19-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process at the time of calling the information program. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling a predetermined information program by a CALL instruction is performed.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the game RWM matches the checksum calculated in step S17 described above. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S19-7. If the checksum is not normal (abnormal in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S19-8. Transfer.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the error information area (other than the performance information area) of the information RWM area. As a result, the error determination state is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipping of the gaming machine 1), and the error determination state before power-off is not inherited. Specifically, the progress control of the game is started assuming that no error has occurred.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) all areas (performance information area, error information area) of the information RWM area. As a result, the data for calculating the performance information of the gaming machine 1 and the error determination state are initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipping of the gaming machine 1), and the information RWM area before power-off Will not be inherited. Specifically, the progress control of the game is started assuming that there is no history of the game.

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return process. Specifically, processing for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interrupts, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S19-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is within the appropriate range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S19-12, and the set value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past). In this case, the initial value "1" is set as the set value in step S19-11. At this point, only the provisional setting value is set, and the initial setting value is not saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-12. Specifically, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, it becomes possible for the game shop staff to grasp the set value before the change by checking the information display 113.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting value update operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If the setting value update operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-14, and if the setting value update operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-17.

The main CPU 110a updates the set value by +1 in step S19-14, and performs the set value correction process in step S19-15. Specifically, when the updated set value is "5" which is out of the proper range, the set value is corrected to "1".

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-16. Specifically, the set value displayed on the 7-segment LED of the information display 113 is updated. As a result, it becomes possible for the game store staff to grasp the updated set value by checking the information display 113.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a set value confirming operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If the set value confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-18 assuming that the set value has been confirmed (ends the setting change mode), and if the set value confirmation operation has not been performed, the set value is updated. Then, the process proceeds to step S19-13 assuming that there is a possibility of being performed.

The main CPU 110a saves the set value in the set value area of the game RWM area in step S19-18, ends the display of the set value on the information display 113 in step S19-19, and in step S19-20. , The output of the setting change signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is finished. As a result, processing for ending acceptance of the setting change signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

In step S19-21, the main CPU 110a clears the setting change flag saved in the game RWM area, and ends the setting change process this time.

After that, in step S25 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, a power-on designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130, and processing for terminating the setting change notification and executing the power-on notification is executed. Will be done.

In this way, even if the set value is not within the proper range, the initial value "1" is set as the set value, so that an undefined value is set as the set value and the gaming machine is set. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine without causing an unforeseen operation to annoy the game store or the player.

Also, immediately after the setting change process is started, a setting change signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the output of the setting change signal is ended immediately before the setting change process is ended. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the processing (setting change) related to the security has started and ended in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer), and it is possible to help detect fraudulent activity. Become.

If the checksum is normal, only the error information area of the information RWM area is initialized, so that the saved data (normal history information such as the base value) remains in the performance information area. The state relating to the error determination can be initialized for the convenience of the game arcade side, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, during the setting change process (display of the setting change screen), input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, The presence or absence of signal input from the second start opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, the out ball detection switch 57a) is monitored. It is supposed not to.

In other words, the occurrence of a winning (ball) of a game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) Even if a win occurs during the setting change process (display of the setting change screen) because it is not monitored (detected) (the payout amount designation command described later is not sent to the payout control board 120), the win is invalid. Therefore, the payout of game balls is not performed. In addition, since the occurrence of various errors is not monitored (detected) (the error designation command described later is not transmitted to the effect control board 130), an error occurs during the setting change process (display of the setting change screen). Also, error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load without performing unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during the setting change.

Although the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized before the set value fixing operation is performed, the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized after the setting value fixing operation is performed. You may make it into. Specifically, the processing from step S19-4 to step S19-9 may be performed after step S19-18. Further, the game RWM area and the information RWM area may be initialized both before and after the set value confirming operation.

Further, although the setting key confirmation operation is performed by changing the setting key switch 112a from the ON state to the OFF state, it may be possible that the RWM clear switch 111a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch is turned OFF. The state may be changed to the ON state, or the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state. The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a or the like) provided at a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state. It may be possible that it is turned on.

Also, the setting change designation command is sent at the start of the setting change process and the power-on designation command is sent after the setting change process is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process is completed.

(Modification of setting change process)
A modified example of the setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a modification of the setting change process of the main control board 110. Here, only the parts different from the setting change process of FIG. 20 will be described, and the same parts will be denoted by the same step numbers and description thereof will be omitted.

In the modification of the setting change process shown in FIG. 21, steps S19-17A and S19-17B are provided between steps S19-17 and S19-18 in the setting change process shown in FIG.

The overall CPU 141a displays the confirmed set value on the information display 113 in step S19-17A. Specifically, the set value displayed on the 7-segment LED of the information display 113 is maintained, and the DP (decimal point) of the 7-segment LED on which the set value is displayed is turned on. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming shop staff to confirm the set value by confirming the information display 113, and to grasp the confirmed set value.

The overall CPU 141a determines in step S19-17B whether or not a setting change end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RW clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. When the setting change end operation is performed, the process is moved to step S19-18 to end the setting change mode, and when the setting change end operation is not performed, the process of step S19-17B is repeated.

In this way, since the confirmed set value is displayed on the information display 113 until the setting change end operation is performed, the confirmed set value can be accurately grasped, and the game store staff may overlook the confirmed set value. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, since the display mode of the set value before confirmation and the display mode of the set value after confirmation are different, it is possible to accurately grasp that the set value has been confirmed, and the setting change is completed before the setting value confirmation operation is performed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of performing an operation.

Although the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized before the set value fixing operation is performed, the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized after the setting value fixing operation is performed. You may make it carry out. Specifically, the processing from step S19-4 to step S19-9 may be performed after step S19-17A. Further, the game RWM area and the information RWM area may be initialized both before and after the set value confirming operation.

Further, although the setting change end operation is performed by changing the RWM clear switch 111a from the OFF state to the ON state, it may be possible that the open detection switch 31a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch is turned OFF. The state may be changed to the ON state, or the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 to change the touch sensor 15a from the OFF state to the ON state. The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a) provided at a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state. It may be possible that it is turned on.

(Main control board RWM clear processing)
The RWM clearing process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is within the proper range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S 24-2, and the set value is not within the proper range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past). In that case, the process proceeds to step S24-10.

In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a starts outputting the RWM clearing signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM is being cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. As a result, processing for accepting the RWM clearing signal is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

The main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S24-3. Thereby, the process for executing the RWM clear preparation notification for notifying that the RWM clear is performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

The "RWM clear preparation notification" means to display a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is performed by operating the RWM clear switch 111a on the image display device, or clear the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 to the RWM clear. This means that all lights are emitted in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the confirmation. It should be noted that the voice output device 9 may output an in-confirmation notification sound (“RWM is cleared by operating the RWM clear switch”) indicating that the RWM clear confirmation is in progress.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a clear confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a clear confirmation operation, the process proceeds to step S24-5, and if there is no clear confirmation operation, the process of step S24-4 is repeated.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 is shipped), and the data (other than the set value) in the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited. Become.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs a process at the time of calling the information program. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling a predetermined information program by a CALL instruction is performed.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the error information area used for various error determinations in the information RWM area. As a result, the error determination state is initialized to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 is shipped), and the error determination state before the RWM clear is not inherited.

In step S24-8, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return-time process. Specifically, processing for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interrupts, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S24-9, the main CPU 110a ends the output of the RWM clearing signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. As a result, processing for ending acceptance of the RWM clearing signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer or the like). When this process ends, the RWM clear process of this time ends.

After that, in step S25 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, a power-on designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 to terminate the RWM clear preparation notification and execute the power-on notification. Will be done.

The main CPU 110a performs a non-recoverable error process in step S24-10. Specifically, the set value error information is displayed on the information display 113, and after the non-recoverable error designation command indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the timer interrupt is prohibited. After setting the interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error, and the power is completely supplied. Perform the process of waiting until it is rejected.

In this way, if the set value is not within the proper range, the game progress is stopped by executing the non-recoverable error process that stops the progress of the game, and the game machine performs unexpected operation. It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine without causing trouble to the game shop and the player due to the above.

Also, immediately after the RWM clear processing is started, the RWM clearing signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the output of the RWM clearing signal is ended immediately before the RWM clear processing is ended. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the processing (RWM clear) related to security has started and ended in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer), and it is possible to help detect fraudulent activity. Become.

Further, during the RWM clear process (display of the clear confirmation screen), input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, first start opening detection switch 45a, The presence or absence of signal input from the 2 start opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, the out ball detection switch 57a) is not monitored. It is like this.

In other words, the occurrence of a winning (ball) of a game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) Even if a winning occurs during the RWM clearing process (display of the clear confirmation screen) by not monitoring (detecting) (the payout amount designation command described later is not transmitted to the payout control board 120), the winning is invalid. As a result, game balls are not paid out. Further, by not monitoring (detecting) the occurrence of various errors (the error designation command is not transmitted to the production control board 130), even if an error occurs during the RWM clear processing (display of the clear confirmation screen), error notification is given. Is not done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load without performing unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during RWM clear.

If it is determined in step S24-1 that the setting value is not within the proper range, the process returns to the non-recoverable error process, but if it is determined in step S24-1 that the setting value is not within the proper range. Alternatively, the initial value "1" may be set as the setting value and the process may proceed to step S24-2.

Further, the RWM clear designation command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed. However, instead of the RWM clear designation command, the RWM clear start designation command is transmitted. However, the RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear processing, or may be transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S26-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is within the proper range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S26-2, and the set value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past). In that case, the process proceeds to step S26-8.

In step S26-2, the main CPU 110a starts outputting the setting confirmation signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, processing for accepting the setting confirmation signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S26-3. Thereby, the process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting control is performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

The “setting confirmation notification” means that a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the image display device, or a predetermined light emission is performed during the setting confirmation of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. It is to turn on all lights in a color (for example, white). Note that a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed may be output from the audio output device 9.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S26-4. Specifically, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game shop staff can confirm the current set value by checking the information display 113.

In step S26-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process proceeds to step S26-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S26-5 is repeated.

In step S26-6, the main CPU 110a finishes displaying the set value on the information display 113, and in step S26-7, a setting confirmation signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Ends the output of. As a result, processing for ending acceptance of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like). When this process ends, the current setting confirmation process ends.

After that, in step S29 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, a power restoration specification command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130, and processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and executing the power restoration notification is performed. Will be done.

The main CPU 110a performs a non-recoverable error process in step S26-8. Specifically, the set value error information is displayed on the information display 113, and after the non-recoverable error designation command indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the timer interrupt is prohibited. After the interrupt is prohibited and the output port is cleared, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error, and the power supply is completely cut off. Wait until it is processed.

In this way, if the set value is not within the proper range, the game progress is stopped by executing the non-recoverable error process that stops the progress of the game, and the game machine performs unexpected operation. It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine without causing trouble to the game shop and the player due to the above.

In addition, immediately after the setting confirmation processing is started, a setting confirmation in-progress signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the output of the setting confirmation in-progress signal is ended immediately before the setting confirmation processing ends. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the processing (setting confirmation) related to the security has started and ended in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer), and it is possible to help detect fraudulent activity. Become.

Also, during the setting confirmation process (display of the setting change screen), input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, The presence or absence of signal input from the second start opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, the out ball detection switch 57a) is monitored. It is supposed not to.

In other words, the occurrence of a winning (ball) of a game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) Even if a win occurs during the setting confirmation process (display of the setting change screen) by not monitoring (detecting) (the payout amount designation command described below is not transmitted to the payout control board 120), the win is invalid. Therefore, the payout of game balls is not performed. In addition, since the occurrence of various errors is not monitored (detected) (the error designation command is not transmitted to the production control board 130), an error notification is issued based on the occurrence of an error during the setting confirmation process (display of the setting change screen). Is not done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load without performing unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during setting confirmation.

If it is determined in step S26-1 that the set value is not within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S26-2 without setting the initial value "1" for the set value instead of proceeding to the non-recoverable error process. You may make it shift.

In addition, the setting confirmation specification command is sent at the start of the setting confirmation processing, and the power restoration specification command is transmitted after the setting confirmation processing ends. However, instead of the setting confirmation specification command, the setting confirmation start specification command is transmitted. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed.

In the present embodiment, during execution of the setting change processing, the RWM clear processing, and the setting confirmation processing, the setting change signal, the RWM clear signal, and the setting confirmation signal are output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Security signals are output, but these signals may be output from separate output terminals.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process are being executed, the security signal is output from the start of the process to the end of the process. The security signal may be output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) at the timing of.

Further, in the present embodiment, during execution of the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a). , First start opening detection switch 45a, second start opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening detection switch 53a, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a. Although the presence/absence of a signal input from (1) is not monitored, it may be monitored. In this case, only the presence or absence of the signal input from the input device may be monitored, or the signal input of only a specific input device related to security such as the magnetic detection sensor 55a and the radio wave detection sensor 56a may be monitored. An error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 when there is an input.

(Main RAM initialization timing and initialization area)
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initialization timing of the main RAM 110c and the initialization area.

As shown in FIG. 24, the main RAM 110c is initialized when the setting change processing is executed and when the RWM clear processing is executed. In the setting change processing, the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is normal. In some cases, the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is abnormal.

In the game RWM area, a set value area in which set values are stored, a determination information area in which the checksum of the main RAM 110c is stored, a game data area in which data related to the progress of the game is stored, and data are stored. A stack area for saving and an unused area where no data is stored are provided.

In the information RWM area, a performance information area in which information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 (a game ball count value described later, a normal base value described later) is stored, and information used for various error determinations are stored. An error information area, a stack area for saving data, and an unused area in which no data is stored are provided.

When the initialization opportunity is the setting change processing and the RWM area is abnormal, areas other than the setting value area are initialized (cleared to 0). On the other hand, when the initialization trigger is the setting change process and the RWM region is not abnormal, and when the initialization trigger is the RWM clear process, other than the set value region, the performance information region, and the information RWM region stack region. Area is initialized (cleared to 0).

Although the performance information area and the error information area are provided in the information RWM area, at least one may be provided in the game RWM area. Even in this case, the performance information area and the error information area are initialized. The relationship between the trigger and the area to be initialized may be the same as that described above. For example, when the error information area is provided in the game RWM area, the game RWM area is initialized when the setting change processing and the RWM clear processing are executed, but the information RWM area is not initialized.

(Main control board timer interrupt processing)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control board 110.

In the timer interrupt process, after the initialization process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110 at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds). It will be executed.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area in step S100, and performs the time control process in step S110. Specifically, the process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random value updating process in step S120. Specifically, big hit judgment random number value, special symbol judgment random number value, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, hit judgment random value, normal symbol judgment random value, public figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value Specifically, the process of updating by adding +1 to each random number value and the random number counter is performed. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, The initial random number value to be set is set as a new orbital initial value, and the random number value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, the big hit determination initial random number value, special symbol determination initial random number value, hit determination initial random number value, normal symbol determination initial random number value is updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special power control process. Specifically, the determination of the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the large winning port Processing such as opening and closing (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) and setting a game state is performed. The details of the special map special power control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a universal figure universal communication control process. Specifically, processing such as determination of the acquired universal figure determination information based on passage of the game ball to the universal figure gate 44, variable display of normal symbols, opening/closing of the second starting opening 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed.

In addition, the type of hit ordinary symbol and the type of lost ordinary symbol determined as the determination result of the universal symbol determination information performed in the universal symbol/general electric control processing are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game play is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of each type of normal symbol, which is determined as the determination result of the universal pattern determination information performed in the universal pattern general electric power control process, the selection ratio of various lost normal symbols, is constant without changing by the set value. ing. By doing so, the advantage degree of the player is not extremely changed by the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c are referred to, and various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second winning opening). Processing for transmitting the payout amount designation command corresponding to the special winning opening 53) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes the process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs a data creation process in step S600. Specifically, external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second winning opening. Special winning opening/closing data to be output to the mouth opening/closing solenoid 54b, special symbol display data to be output to the first special symbol display device 60 and second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 62, the first 1 special symbol hold indicator 63, special symbol hold display data to be output to the second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold indicator 65, etc. are processed to create data.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs a process at the time of calling the information program. Specifically, after prohibiting the interrupt, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

In step S720, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (information program). Specifically, it determines whether or not various errors (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error described later) have occurred, and an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred. Is performed to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

In step S740, the main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program). Specifically, the number of payouts (the number of payout balls) to be paid out by winning the game balls to the various winning openings and the number of outs (the number of outballs) discharged from the game area 5a (launched to the game area). ) Etc. are counted (collected). The details of the game ball counting process will be described later.

In step S760, the main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program). Specifically, a process of calculating the performance information of the gaming machine from the number of payouts (the number of payout balls) and the number of outs (the number of outballs) counted (collected) in the game ball counting process is performed. The details of the performance information calculation process will be described later.

In step S770, the main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program). Specifically, a process of setting performance display data for displaying the performance information calculated by the performance information calculation process on the information display unit 113 is performed. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

In step S790, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return-time process. Specifically, processing for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interrupts, and returning to the game program is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process in step S800. Specifically, the port output processing for outputting signals such as the external output data created in step S600, the starting opening/closing data, the special winning opening/closing data, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, and special symbol hold display Display output processing for outputting signals such as data, normal symbol hold display data, and performance display data (performance information) set in step S770 to various display devices, and is set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. The payout command transmission process of transmitting a command to the payout control board 120 and the production command transmission process of transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 or the production control board 130 are executed. Perform processing.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

As described above, during the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode, since the timer interrupt is not executed, the number of payouts and the number of outs are counted, the performance information of the gaming machine is calculated, Since the performance information of the gaming machine is not displayed, the control load on the main control board can be reduced.

(Main control board input control processing)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the general winning opening 43, and a prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the first big winning opening detection switch 50a or the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, that is, the game ball is put into the first big winning opening 50 or the second big winning opening 53. It is determined whether or not it is done, and the process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start opening 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input processing will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start opening detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal figure gate 44, and acquiring and storing the universal figure determination information. I do.

(Processing for inputting the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input. When the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 The starting port detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three award balls to the three award ball counter used for the three award balls, and in a step S230-3, the special figure determination is performed. Information (a big hit determination random number value, a special symbol determination random number value, a reach determination random number value, a special pattern variation pattern determination random number value) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting opening The detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special figure reservation number (U1) to update (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the first special figure reservation number. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1) are displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a vacant storage unit from the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit obtained in step S230-3. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the non-time saving game state. If it is in the non-time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time saving game state, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14 is referred to, the special symbol determination information acquired this time is pre-determined before the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the pre-determination (special feature The first starting opening winning award designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the (scheduled variation pattern) is generated.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first start winning combination designation command generated in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first start prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as a first start mouth prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start mouth prize designation command makes the first start. Before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the mouth prize designation command is started, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) that expects that the jackpot game is executed over one or more variable displays ) Can be performed.

Since the same processing as the first starting opening detection switch input processing is performed for the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the three prize ball counter, and the first special figure reservation number. (U1), the first special figure determination information holding storage area, the non-time saving game state, the first pre-determination process, the portion of the first starting opening winning designation command, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, two prize ball counter, It should be read as the second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, the time saving game state, the second preliminary determination process, and the second start opening winning award designation command.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the second special figure reservation number (U2) is “4”, but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second special figure reservation number may be decreased as compared with the upper limit value of the first special figure reservation number. Further, the second pending storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Special control of special control of main control board)
The special figure special power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special figure special power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric power process data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric power process data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. This special figure special electric power control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special symbol special power processing data=0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310) for starting the variable display of the special symbols is executed based on the pending storage, and the special symbol special power processing data= If 1, the special symbol variation process (step S320) for stopping and displaying the special symbol by the passage of the variation time is executed, and if the special symbol special electricity processing data=2, the stop symbol has elapsed and the special symbol stopped. Depending on the type, the special symbol stop process (step S330) for shifting the process to the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, and if the special map special electric power process data=3, the big hit game for executing the big hit game If processing (step S340) is executed and special figure special power processing data=4, big jack game end processing (step S350) for ending the big hit game is executed, and if special figure special power processing data=5, The small hit game process (step S360) for executing the small hit game is executed. The details of each process will be described later.

This "special figure special electric power processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the special electric figure special electric power control processing as described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. ..

(Special symbol memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and if the special symbols are not being displayed in a varying manner, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the second special figure reservation number (U2) to update it in step S310-3, and corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. The special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for updating the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets it in the second special figure determination information storage area. The stored data is shifted to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information holding storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game that has been performed is deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-5. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the first special figure reservation number (U1) to update it in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special special figure reservation number (U1) corresponding to the subtracted first special figure reservation number (U1). The symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for updating the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol hold storage area. The specified data determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

With the shift process of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special figure reservation number (U1) and the second special figure reservation number (U2) after the subtraction is displayed in the main RAM 110c. Set to a predetermined area of. Thereby, the display contents of the first special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64 will be updated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted with priority over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area (the second special figure reservation number is 1 priority map reserve number is subtracted in preference), but in the order in which the game ball entered the starting opening, the first special map determination information reserve storage area or the second special map determination information reserve storage area It is possible to shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number in the winning order), or to give priority to the first special figure determination information reservation storage area over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. May be shifted (the first special figure reservation number is subtracted in preference to the second special figure reservation number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot and the stop special figure data of the special symbol based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. The jackpot determination process is executed. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designating command corresponding to the special symbol type determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) based on the special symbol judgment information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol judgment information execution storage area, for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern. I do. The details of the special figure variation pattern determination processing will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination processing in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the fluctuation effect pattern which is the effect mode of the fluctuation effect performed during the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , Start the variable display of special symbols. Thereby, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800. The variable display of the special symbol will be performed on the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric power process data, and ends the special symbol storage determination process of this time. To do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state flag indicating the customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination process this time is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the variable display of the normal symbol and the fact that the auxiliary game is not executed are included in the requirements. May be.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is in a waiting state is produced for the main RAM 110c. Set in the transmission data storage area, and finish the special symbol storage determination process this time. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the customer waiting effect for prompting the player to play the game is performed.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a big hit determination process in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting values stored in the game RWM area, and in step S311-2, selects the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is shifted from the first special figure determination information holding storage area, FIG. ) The big hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in) is selected, and if it is shifted from the second special symbol determination information holding storage area, the big hit for the second special symbol shown in FIG. Select the judgment table.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a compares the current probability game state and the jackpot determination random number value with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot is won. If the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S311-4. If the jackpot is not won, the process proceeds to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the winning state data (any one of 00H to 02H) according to the current game state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, FIG. The special symbol determination table for jackpot shown in) is selected, and the process proceeds to step S311-9.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a collates the present probability game state and the random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot is won. If the small hit is won, the process proceeds to step S311-7. If the small hit is not won, the process proceeds to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 11C, and shifts the processing to step S311-9.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for loss shown in FIG. 11B, and shifts the processing to step S311-9.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), the special symbol determination random number value for which special jackpot determination (lottery) is to be performed, with the special symbol determination table. Then, the special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is determined.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special figure data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this big hit determination process.

(Special control fluctuation pattern determination process of main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the non-time saving game state. If it is in the non-time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S313-2. If it is not in the non-time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S313-3.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving game state shown in FIG. 12, and shifts the processing to step S311-4.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state shown in FIG. 13, and shifts the processing to step S310-7-4.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a collates the determination result of the big hit determination, the type of the special symbol, the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value with the special figure variation pattern determination table to change the special figure variation. Determine the pattern.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets a variation time corresponding to the determined special pattern variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, the special diagram variation corresponding to the determined special pattern variation pattern. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the current special figure variation pattern determination processing is ended. As a result, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the fluctuation effect pattern that is the effect mode of the fluctuation effect is performed.

(Special control fluctuation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S315 has elapsed. If the variable time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2 to stop the variable display of the special symbol, and if the variable time has not elapsed, in order to continue the variable display of the special symbol, This special symbol variation process ends.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a sets data for stopping and displaying the special symbol corresponding to the stop special figure data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c to stop and display the special symbol. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol determination command corresponding to the stop special figure data set in the main RAM 110c in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for stopping and displaying the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets a stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-5, sets "2" to the special figure special power processing data. Set and end the special symbol variation process this time.

(Special symbol stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320-4 has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process moves to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process of this time is ended in order to continue the stop display of the special symbol.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game end determination process. Specifically, when the time saving game flag indicating that the time saving game is in the main RAM 110c is set, the time saving time (J) stored in the main RAM 110c is subtracted by 1, and the time saving time is "0". If it is, the processing is ended after shifting to the non-time saving game state by clearing the time saving game flag.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game end determination process. Specifically, when the high-probability game flag indicating the high-probability game state is set in the main RAM 110c, the high-probability number (X) stored in the main RAM 110c is subtracted by 1, and the high-probability number is increased. When (X) is "0", the process is ended after shifting to the low-probability game state by clearing the high-probability game flag.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for updating the game state grasped by the effect control board 130 or updating the effect mode is performed.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a big hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-6. If it is not a big hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-9.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets "3" in the special figure special electric power processing data and prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game processing, and in step S330-7, the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 110c. , High probability game flag, time saving number (J) and high probability number (X) are cleared to shift to a low probability non-time saving game state.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process in step S330-8. Specifically, the type of jackpot game corresponding to the stop special figure data is determined from the jackpot opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 15, and the control data corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is specified.

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a small hit special symbol. If it is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-10. If it is not a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-14.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets "5" in the special figure special electric power processing data and prepares to move the processing to the small hitting game processing, and in step S330-11, performs the small hitting start preparation setting processing. Specifically, the control data for the small hit game is specified.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of the big hit game or the small hit game in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S330-13, sets the big hit game or the small hit game type. The corresponding opening time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the special symbol stop processing of this time is ended. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a process for executing the opening effect of the jackpot game is performed.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special symbol special electric power process data and prepares to move the process to the special symbol memory determination process, and ends the special symbol stop process this time.

(Big control game processing of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 34, a jackpot game process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a big hit game process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c is "0". If it is currently being opened, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is not currently opened, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-10 has elapsed. It is determined that the opening time has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-3. If the opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process of this time is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start setting process in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to and stored in the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c. Here, since no round game has been played yet, the number of round games (R) becomes "1".

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the number of releases (K) stored in the main RAM 110c is updated by adding "1". Further, in order to open the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 or the second big winning opening opening/closing member 54, energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 54b is set. At the same time, the opening time of the first special winning opening 50 or the second special winning opening 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K).

The main CPU 110a performs a round designation command transmission determination process in step S340-5. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K=1, and if K=1, a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the round game effect according to the number of rounds is performed.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending mentioned here means a process after all preset round games have been completed. Therefore, if the ending is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-18. If the ending is not currently performed, the process proceeds to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is being closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 54b is set. As a result, if it is determined that the special winning opening is closed, the process proceeds to step S340-8, and if it is determined that the special winning opening is not closed, the process proceeds to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening set in step S340-10 described later has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game processing of this time is ended to maintain the closing of the special winning opening, and if the closing time has elapsed, the big winning opening is opened to step S340-4. Transfer processing.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the special winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, whether or not the number of large winning opening balls (C), which is the number of game balls entering the large winning opening, has reached a prescribed number (9), or once in the number of times of opening (K). It is determined whether or not the per-opening time has passed. If the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the processing is moved to step S340-10, and if the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the current jackpot game processing is ended.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 54b in order to close the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 or the second big winning opening opening/closing member 54. Is cleared, and the closing time of the first special winning opening 50 or the second special winning opening 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K).

In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has ended. If one round game is over, the process moves to step S340-12, and if one round game is not over, this big hit game process is over.

The main CPU 110a performs a round data initialization process in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of times of opening (K) stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared and the number of large winning opening balls (C) is cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c is the maximum value. If the number of round games (R) is the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S340-15, and if the number of round games (R) is not the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c and stores the result, and ends the jackpot game process this time.

The main CPU 110a clears the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c in step S340-15, sets the ending designation command in the production transmission data storage area in step S340-16, and then returns to step S340-. In 17, the ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the jackpot game process this time is ended. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in step S340-17 has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-19, the special figure special electric power processing data is set to "4" to prepare for the jackpot game end processing, and if the ending time has not elapsed, this time The jackpot game process of is ended.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data and the winning state data stored in the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and performs processing as to whether to set the high probability flag based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. For example, if the stop special figure data is "02", the high probability flag is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and sets the high probability count (X) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. To do. For example, if the stop special map data is "02", the high probability number (X) is set to 50,000 times.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and performs processing as to whether or not to set the time saving game flag based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", the time saving game flag is not set if the winning status data is 00H, but the time saving game flag is set if the winning status data is 01H or 02H.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and sets the number of times saved (J) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. .. For example, when the stop special figure data is "01", if the winning state data is 00H, 0 times is set as the time saving number (J), and if the winning state data is 01H or 02H, the time saving number (J) is set. As 100 times.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designating command corresponding to the game state corresponding to the high probability flag and the time saving game flag in the production transmission data storage area, and in step S350-7, the special figure special electricity process. The data is set to 0 and preparations are made to move to the special symbol memory determination process, and the jackpot game ending process this time is ended.

(Main control board abnormality determination process)
The abnormality determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process (information program) in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the game stack pointer in the information RWM area in step S721, sets the information stack pointer in step S722, and saves the register in the information RWM area in step S723.

In step S724, the main CPU 110a performs an incorrect winning error determination process. Specifically, when the game ball is won in the second starting port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, and when the game ball is won in the big winning port when not in the special game (big hit game, small hit game) Then, it is determined that an illegal winning error has occurred, and an illegal winning error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the illegal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the illegal winning error notification (displaying the illegal winning error image on the image display device, outputting the illegal winning error sound) is performed. It will be.

In step S725, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormal winning error determination process. Specifically, the number of game balls and the winning balls won in the various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) When the number of game balls discharged from the prize-winning ball flow path to be flowed down does not match, an abnormal prize-winning error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c as an abnormal prize-winning error has occurred. As a result, an abnormal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing abnormal winning error notification (displaying an abnormal winning error image on the image display device, outputting an abnormal winning error sound) is performed. It will be.

The main CPU 110a performs a magnetic error determination process in step S726. Specifically, when an abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 55a for a predetermined period, it is determined that a magnetic error has occurred and a magnetic error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the magnetic error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the magnetic error notification (display of the magnetic error image on the image display device, output of the magnetic error sound) is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a radio wave error determination process in step S727. Specifically, when an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 56a for a predetermined period, a radio wave error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c as a radio wave error has occurred. As a result, the radio wave error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing radio wave error notification (display of a radio wave error image on the image display device, output of a radio wave error sound) is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a door opening error determination process in step S728. Specifically, when the open detection switch 31a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that a door open error has occurred, and a door open error start designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c, and the open detection switch 31a is turned off. In this state, the door open error is canceled and the door open error end designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a door opening error start designation command and a door opening error end designation command are transmitted to the production control board 130, and a door opening error notification (display of a door opening error image on the image display device, output of a door opening error sound) is issued. Processing for execution will be performed.

In step S729, the main CPU 110a performs operation error determination processing, and ends the current abnormality determination processing. Specifically, an operation error occurs when the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the above-described initial setting process of step S10 is completed). The operation error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the operation error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing operation error notification (display of the operation error image on the image display device, output of the operation error sound) is performed. The details of the operation error determination process will be described later.

In this way, it is determined whether or not various errors (abnormalities) have occurred while the progress control of the game is being performed (after completion of the initial setting process of step S10 described above), and the error has occurred. In this case, the processing for causing the error notification is performed, so that the security of the gaming machine 1 can be ensured.

In addition, by executing the abnormality determination process with the performance program, it is possible to proceed with the division of the functions of the game program (the program relating to the progress control of the game) and the performance program (the program not relating to the progress control of the game). Therefore, the program design can be facilitated, and it is possible to contribute to the creation of a more entertaining game program.

In the abnormality determination process, the operation error determination process for determining an illegal operation of the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is executed, but the operation error determination process may not be executed.

(Main control board operation error determination process)
The operation error determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an operation error determination process (performance program) on the main control board.

First, in step S729-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. When the state changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that a setting key error, which is one kind of operation error, has occurred without shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the process is moved to step S729-2 and turned OFF. If the state is not the ON state, the process proceeds to step S729-3.

In step S729-2, the main CPU 110a sets the setting key error start designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the setting key error start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for starting the setting key error notification is performed.

In step S729-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If the ON state is changed to the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S729-4 assuming that the setting key error has been canceled, and if the ON state is not changed to the OFF state, the process is performed to step S729-5. Transfer.

In step S729-4, the main CPU 110a sets the setting key error end designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the setting key error end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a process for ending the setting key error notification is performed.

In step S729-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If it is in the ON state, it is determined that there is a possibility of a clear switch error, which is one type of operation error, without shifting to the setting change mode or the RWM clear mode, and the process is moved to step S729-6. If it is (OFF state), the process proceeds to step S729-9.

In step S729-6, the main CPU 110a updates the continuation counter for monitoring the duration of the ON state of the RWM clear switch 111a by +1, and in step S729-7, the continuation counter is set to the specified value (for example, 10). Or not. If it is the specified value, it is determined that a clear switch error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S729-8. If it is not the specified value, the current operation error determination process is ended. The continuation counter is set in the information RWM.

In step S729-8, the main CPU 110a sets the clear switch error designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the clear switch error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the clear switch error notification is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).

In step S729-9, the main CPU 110a clears (initializes) the continuation counter to 0, and ends the operation error determination process this time.

Thus, while the progress control of the game is being performed (after completion of the initial setting process of step S10 described above), the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a is monitored and the operation is performed. In this case, since the operation error notification (setting key error notification, clear switch error notification) is performed, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operation on the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a.

Further, while the progress control of the game is being performed, even if the setting key switch 112a is operated, the mode does not shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, so that the progress control of the game is not obstructed and the game is prevented. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the progress of the process becomes unstable.

Further, while the progress control of the game is being performed, even if the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, it does not shift to the setting change mode or the RWM clear mode, so that the progress control of the game is not obstructed, and the game is prevented. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the progress of the process becomes unstable.

Note that when a setting key error occurs, the setting key error notification is executed until the setting key switch 112a changes from the ON state to the OFF state, but it may be continued until the power is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easier to detect an illegal operation and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an illegal act.

Further, when the clear switch error occurs, the clear switch error notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), but it may be continued until the power is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easier to detect an illegal operation and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an illegal act.

Further, while the setting key error notification and the clear switch error notification are being executed, it is set so that the RWM clear switch 111a is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state) so as not to determine the occurrence of the clear switch error. The key error notification and the clear switch error notification may be ended.

Further, although both the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are monitored, only one of them may be monitored and the operation error notification may be performed.

(Game ball counting process of main control board)
The game ball counting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process (information program) in the main control board 110.

First, in step S741, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S742 as counting the number of normal medium payouts which is the number of payouts in the normal game state. If it is not in the normal game state, the number of normal medium payouts is not counted. As a matter, the processing is moved to step S750.

In step S742, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the game ball is not won in the general winning opening 43, the process is moved to step S744, and if the detection signal is input, the game ball is in the general winning opening 43. In step S743, the payout amount (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the general winning opening 43 is added to the normal medium payout number counter for counting the normal medium payout number, in step S743. The normal medium payout number counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S744, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the first special winning opening detection switch 50a or the second special winning opening detection switch 53a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the game ball has not been won in the special winning opening, and the process proceeds to step S746. If the detection signal is input, the game ball is entered in the special winning opening. As a result, in step S745, "15" which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the special winning opening is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

The number of payouts (the number of prize balls) when the game balls win the first big winning opening 50 is 15, and the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) when the game balls win the second large winning opening 53. The number of payouts corresponding to each special winning opening may be different, such as ten. In this case, when a detection signal is input from the first special winning opening detection switch 50a, the normal medium payout number counter is set to "15" which is the payout amount (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the first special winning opening 50. When the detection signal is input from the second special winning opening detection switch 53a, when the payout amount (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the second special winning opening 53 is added to the normal medium payout number counter, "10" is added. Good.

In step S746, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the first starting opening detection switch 45a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the game ball has not been won in the first starting opening 45, and the process proceeds to step S748. If the detection signal is input, the first starting opening 45 is set. Assuming that the game ball has won, in step S747, "3" which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the first starting opening 45 is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

In step S748, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the second starting opening detection switch 47a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the game ball has not won in the second starting port 47, the process proceeds to step S750, and if the detection signal is input, the second starting port 47 is set. Assuming that the game ball has won, in step S749, "2" which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the second starting opening 47 is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the out-ball detection switch 57a. When the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that there is no out ball which is the game ball discharged from the game area 5a, the current game ball counting process is terminated, and when the detection signal is input, Assuming that there is an out ball, in step S751, "1" is added to the total out number counter for counting the out ball (total out number) in all gaming states. The total out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S752, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is not in the normal game state, the current game ball counting process is ended, and if it is in the normal game state, in step S753, the number of outs in the normal game state (the number of regular outs) is counted. "1" is added to the normal medium out number counter, and the current game ball counting process is ended. The normal medium out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

In this way, before the progress control of the game is performed (the initial setting process of step S10 described above), the progress control of the game is performed without counting and storing the number of payouts and the number of outs (described above. Since the normal medium payout number, the normal medium out number, and the total out number, which are the game information (history information) after the initial setting process of step S10 is completed), the player can execute the game. It is possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) of the gaming machine at that time, and it is possible to use it for calculating performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine.

In addition, even when a game ball is won in the big prize hole by the small hit game during the normal game state, "15" which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the big prize hole is added to the normal medium payout counter. However, when the game ball is won in the big winning hole by the small hit game during the normal game state, the payout amount may not be added to the normal medium payout amount counter.

(Main control board performance information calculation process)
The performance information calculation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the performance information calculation process (information program) in the main control board 110.

In the present embodiment, the state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 is divided into a plurality of gaming sections, and performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine is displayed. Therefore, first, the game section will be described.

The game section is divided by the total number of outs, and the total number of outs counted from the initial power-on or the clearing (initialization) of the information RWM area to 0 due to a data error becomes 300. Up to the first game section, after the first game section, the game section is switched every 60,000 total out number, the second game section, the third game section, the fourth game section... It becomes N game section.

First, in step S761, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the section counter for counting the number of the game section is the first game section value (0) indicating the first game section. To do. If the value is the first game section value, the process is moved to step S762 assuming that the present is the first game section that is not the target of the performance information calculation. If it is not the first game section value, the current performance information is set. The process proceeds to step S763, assuming that it is the game section after the second game section that is the calculation target of. The section counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S762, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total out number counter is equal to or larger than the first section update value (300). If it is equal to or more than the first section update value, the process section is updated to update the game section, and if it is not equal to or more than the first section update value, the game section is not updated and the performance information of this time. The calculation process ends.

In step S763, the main CPU 110a determines the normal base as performance information from the normal medium payout number in the current game section indicated by the normal medium payout number counter and the normal medium out number in the current game section indicated by the normal medium out number counter. A value is calculated and the first decimal place is rounded off, and in step S764, the rounded normal base value is saved in the first area of the base storage area set as the information RWM area.

The "normal base value" refers to the amount of game value used in the game during the normal game state (the number of outs that are the number of game balls that have been shot in the game area or discharged from the game area) during the normal game state. It is the ratio (ratio) of the game value amount (the number of payouts that is the number of game balls to be paid out to the player) to be given in the game, and "(the number of payouts in the normal game state is normal. The number of medium payouts/the number of normal medium outs which is the number of outs in the normal gaming state)×100”.

The "base storage area" is a storage area for storing the normal base values in the four game sections, the first area for storing the normal base value in the current game section, and the previous one. A second area for storing the normal base value in the game section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and a normal base value in the game section three times before And the fourth area of the.

In step S765, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total out number counter is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000). If it is not less than the second section update value, the game section is updated, and the process proceeds to step S766. If it is not more than the second section update value, the game section is not updated, and the performance information of this time is set. The calculation process ends.

The total number of outs is 60,000, which divides the game section after the second game section. The number of 60,000 pieces is about one day in a gaming machine that shoots 100 game balls per minute. It is a number that can guarantee the operating amount of. Therefore, the gaming section is updated when the gaming machine is operated for about one day.

In step S766, the main CPU 110a shifts down the contents of the first to third areas of the base storage area by one, and in step S767, clears the first area of the base storage area to zero. As a result, the normal base value stored in each area is stored as the normal base value in the previous game section, the normal base value in the current game section is reset, and preparations are made for shifting to the next game section. Be seen.

In step S768, the main CPU 110a updates the game section by adding "1" to the section counter, and in step S769, the total out number indicated by the above total out number counter and the normal medium payout indicated by the normal medium payout number counter. The number and the normal medium-out number indicated by the normal medium-out number counter are cleared to 0, a process of shifting to the next game section is performed, and the performance information calculation process of this time is ended.

In this way, by updating the game section by the total number of outs, it is allowed that there is a state in which different setting values are set in one game section. Therefore, it is possible to obtain (memorize) the game information (history information such as the total number of outs, the number of regular outs, the number of regular outs, etc.) over a plurality of set values in one game section, which is disturbed by the setting change. It is possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value) without any need.

In addition, a normal base value (a type of history information) is calculated and stored from the number of regular outs and the number of regular outs for each gaming section as performance information for each gaming section. It becomes possible to provide information for appropriately grasping (evaluating) the actual performance.

Also, for the total number of outs, the number of ordinary medium payouts, and the number of ordinary medium outs, even if the set value is changed, the game information is unaffected (unrelated to the set value). The performance information (normal base value) excluding the influence of can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and can be used for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

Also, by not normally calculating the base value in the first game section, operation confirmation in the pre-shipment inspection of the game machine (operation confirmation of various winning hole detection switches and out ball detection switches by shooting and maintenance of game balls) It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the actual performance of the gaming machine by not providing information of low credibility affected by the above).

In addition, by calculating the normal base value after the second gaming section, it is possible to display a highly reliable normal base value that excludes the influence of the pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine, and to improve the actual performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to provide highly credible information for accurately grasping.

Although the normal base value is calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area every time the performance information calculation processing is executed (every 4 milliseconds), the normal base value in the current game section is calculated. A normal base value in the current game section may be calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area every time when is displayed on the information display 113 (every 20 seconds).

Further, in the first game section, although the normal base value is not calculated, the number of ordinary medium payouts and the number of ordinary medium outs are counted, but the number of ordinary medium payouts and the number of ordinary medium outs are not counted. You can

(Main control board performance display data setting process)
The performance display data setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the performance display data setting process (information program) in the main control board 110.

First, in step S771, the main CPU 110a determines whether the display switching time counter for determining whether to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is the display switching value (0). If it is the display switching value, the process proceeds to step S772 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and if it is not the display switching value, it is displayed on the information display 113. The process moves to step S776 assuming that the performance information to be switched is not switched. It should be noted that when this processing is first executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the value of the display switching time counter is “0” which is the display switching value. The display switching time counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S772, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not the information display 113 has been confirmed to be lit in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the process proceeds to step S774 as if the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information display 113 is displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S773 for confirming the lighting of. It should be noted that when this process is first executed after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 773, the main CPU 110a outputs display data for lighting confirmation for lighting all the segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) forming the information display 113. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S776.

In step S774, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for displaying on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage value is stored. If the normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired and the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data selection is performed. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired. The data selection counter value will be updated in step S782 described later.

In step S775, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and based on the section counter value, the normal medium out number indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value, the information display 113. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on is determined, and the process proceeds to step S776.

In step S776, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data in the output data area of the information RWM area as display information of the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control processing (game program) in step S800 described above is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed. It will be displayed on the display 113. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-described display switching time counter in step S777, and determines in step S778 whether or not the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time for switching the display of the information display unit 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S785. If it is larger than the upper limit value, it is displayed on the information display unit 113. In step S779, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialization) on the assumption that the time for switching the performance information has passed.

In step S780, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-described lighting confirmed flag is present in the information RWM area. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S782. If there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area in step S781, and the process proceeds to step S785. ..

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-described data selection counter in step S782, and determines in step S783 whether the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S785, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S784, and the process proceeds to step S785.

In step S785, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area in step S723, and restores the game stack pointer saved in the information RWM area in step S721 in step S786. The display data setting process ends.

As described above, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are turned on (the lighting confirmation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display 113 is out of order or which segment is out of order.

Also, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 Performance information (normal base value) in one game section can be compared, and it becomes possible to confirm the actual performance of the gaming machine and to grasp the possibility that a fraudulent act was performed.

(Display information on the information display in each game section)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 41, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

As the identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113, “bL.” indicating that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and indicating that it is the normal base value of the previous game section “ There are "b1.", "b2.", which indicates the normal base value of the game section two times before, and "b3.", which indicates the normal base value of the game section three times before.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 113 is “−−” indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is “0”, or the normal out number is “0”. “00” indicating that the normal out number is “1” or more and the normal base value is “1” to “99”, respectively, and the normal base value is There is “99.” indicating that it is “100” or more. When the normal base value is less than “10”, the tens digit of the numerical information is always “0” and is displayed in two digits.

And, regarding the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment, the display mode does not change (lit and displayed) regardless of the gaming section and the number of outs during the normal operation, but regarding the identification information displayed in the identification segment, the gaming section and The display mode is changed (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of normal outs and the like (presence/absence of calculated normal base value and presence/absence of credibility of calculated normal base value).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when the identification information of the game section having no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed in a blinking manner. Further, in the gaming section after the second gaming section, when the identification information (“bL.”) of the current gaming section is displayed, the calculated normal base value is in a period of low credibility (the number of regular medium outs is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, as an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal medium outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is “35”, “bL.” is displayed in blinking on the identification segment of the information display 113 and “35” is displayed on the numerical segment. Will be displayed lit.

As described above, when the normal base value is “99” or less, performance information that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of “00” to “99” is displayed in the numerical segment while the normal base value is displayed. If the value is “100” or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display “99.” is displayed in the numerical segment, so that it is easy to understand that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

If the normal base value is less than “10”, “0” is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical value segment and is displayed in two digits (for example, “01”). It is possible to make effective display by effectively using the seven 7-segment displays.

In the case where the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not a sufficient number for calculating the normal base value. , The identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, so that it is easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

If there is no calculated normal base value, "---" that is not a numerical value is displayed in the numerical value segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It's easier to figure out what's not.

Note that the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball counting process). The processing may be executed in an input control processing that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed not by the output control process which is the game program but by the performance program.

In addition, by the out ball detection switch 57a, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 53, and the out opening 39. Instead of detecting the out sphere consisting of the game sphere that has flown in, the out sphere detection switch 57a may detect only the game sphere that has flowed into the out port. In that case, the out-ball detecting switch 57a, the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, the first big winning opening detecting switch 50a, the second big winning opening detecting switch. The number of outs (total number of outs, number of medium outs) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected at 53a.

(Display example of information display)
Next, display examples 1 to 7 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Display example 1 of information display)
A display example 1 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a display example when the setting is changed when the power is turned on for the first time.

First, when the power is turned on for the first time (power is turned on), the main control board 110 is in the initial control, which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the setting change operation is not performed, a non-recoverable error occurs due to a checksum error, and error information “Er.FF” indicating the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the power is turned on. The error information continues to be displayed until it is turned off.

On the other hand, when the setting change operation is being performed, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the provisional set value “1” is displayed on the information display 113, and the information display is displayed every time the set value update operation is performed. The setting value displayed in 113 is updated to “1”→“2”→“3”. When the set value confirmation operation is performed in that state, the set value “3” displayed on the information display 113 immediately before is confirmed and saved in the set value area of the game RWM, and displayed on the information display 113. The set value “3” that has been set is deleted, and the setting change mode ends.

After that, when the initial setting process ends, the timer interrupt process is started and the game progress control is performed and the normal control is performed. At this time, the confirmation of lighting of the information display 113 is started, and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit, and this state continues for 5 seconds. ..

In this way, when the set value is displayed on the information display 113, the set value is displayed because the value is displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 113 as in the case of displaying the numerical value of the normal base value. Can be easily recognized.

Also, when displaying a set value consisting of a single digit, unlike the case of displaying the value of the normal base value, the value is displayed without the "0" in the tens place, so It becomes difficult to be confused, and it becomes possible to easily recognize that the display is the set value.

In addition, when the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time (the setting value is not saved), the error information of the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display unit 113. It becomes possible to make it easy to recognize what must be done.

In the case of displaying the set value, the value is not displayed on the 7-segment display 113d indicating the 1's digit of the numerical value segment, but is displayed on any one of the other 7-segment displays 113a to 113c of the information display 113. The set value may be displayed, or the set value may be displayed on two or more 7-segment displays of the information display 113.

Further, when the set value is displayed, identification information (for example, “St.”) indicating the set value may be displayed in the identification segment and the set value may be displayed in the numerical segment. In that case, the set value may be displayed in the ones place of the numerical value segment, or the set value may be displayed in the tens place.

Further, instead of displaying the set value only on the information display 113, a special symbol display or a normal symbol display that can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine 1 is configured with a 7-segment display, and a special symbol display The set value may be displayed on either one of the display and the normal symbol display.

(Display example 2 of information display)
The display example 2 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a display example when the RWM clear is performed when the power is turned on (power is turned on again).

First, when the power is turned on (power is supplied), the main control board 110 is in the initial control, which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the RWM clear operation is being performed, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode, but if the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is not within the proper range (here, 1 to 4) Indicates an unrecoverable error due to an abnormal set value, and error information “Er.FF” indicating the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the error information continues to be displayed until the power is turned off. ..

On the other hand, when the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is in the proper range (here, 1 to 4), the information display 113 is in a state of waiting for the clear confirmation operation. When the clear confirmation operation is performed, the RWM clear mode ends.

After that, when the initial setting process ends, the timer interrupt process is started and the game progress control is performed and the normal control is performed. At this time, the lighting confirmation of the information display device 113 is started, and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment display devices (113a to 113d) are turned on, and this state continues for 5 seconds. ..

As described above, in the RWM clear mode when the set value is normal, since no information (for example, the set value or performance information) is displayed on the information display 113, an illegal act such as shifting to the RWM clear mode is performed. Even if this happens, the information that the game store side wants to keep secret does not leak, and the security of the game machine can be improved.

Further, when the set value is abnormal, the error information of the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so that it becomes possible to easily recognize that the set value should be set.

(Display example 3 of information display)
A display example 3 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a display example when the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on (power is turned on again).

First, when the power is turned on (power is turned on again), the main control board 110 is in the initial control, which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the setting confirmation operation is performed, the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, but if the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is not in the proper range (1 to 4). , The error information “Er.FF” indicating the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113 due to the non-recoverable error due to the abnormal setting value, and the error information continues to be displayed until the power is turned off.

On the other hand, when the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is within the proper range (1 to 4), the current setting value (here, “1”) is displayed on the information display 113. When the confirmation end operation is performed, the setting value “1” displayed on the information display 113 is erased and the setting confirmation mode ends.

After that, when the initial setting process ends, the timer interrupt process is started and the game progress control is performed and the normal control is performed. At this time, the lighting confirmation of the information display device 113 is started, and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment display devices (113a to 113d) are turned on, and this state continues for 5 seconds. ..

In this way, when the set value is abnormal, the error information of the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so that it becomes possible to easily recognize that the set value should be set. ..

(Display example 4 of information display)
A display example 4 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a display example when the first game section is started by shifting to the game progress control.

When the progress control of the game is started and becomes the normal control, the confirmation of lighting of the information display 113 is started and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit. This state will continue for 5 seconds.

After that, when the lighting confirmation is completed, the normal base value in the current game section is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, in the identification segment, the first identification information “bL.” indicating that it is the current game section is displayed in blinking, and in the numerical segment there is no calculated normal base value “--”. Is lit up.

The blinking display of the identification segment when the normal base value is displayed in a blinking display mode is a blinking display of a 0.6 second cycle in which lighting for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds are repeated. The same applies to the blinking display of the identification segment appearing in the following description.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, the identification segment is blinkingly displayed with the second identification information "b1." indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the third identification information "b2." indicating that it is the game section two times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the third identification information "b3." indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the first game section is 300 and the first game section ends, the display of the normal base value in the current game section to the game section three times before is displayed. Each time 5 seconds, which is the switching time, elapses, the switching is sequentially performed.

In this way, before displaying the normal base value in each game section in order, since the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is performed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), whether each segment of the information display 113 is out of order or not It is possible to confirm whether or not it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of erroneously recognizing the numerical value when the normal base value is displayed thereafter.

Further, since the time for checking the lighting and the time for displaying the normal base value in each game section are the same, it is possible to easily recognize the idling period before displaying the normal base value.

In addition, since there is no normal base value to be calculated in the first game section, the normal base value is not displayed, so compared to the case of displaying a normal base value with low credibility, after that (after the second game section) It is possible to improve the reliability of the displayed normal base value.

Also, regarding the display of a plurality of game sections without the calculated normal base value, "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value is commonly displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 113. , It becomes possible to easily recognize that there is no calculated normal base value.

(Display example 5 of information display)
Display Example 5 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a display example when the first game section is switched to the second game section.

First, in the first game section, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b2.” indicating that it is a game section two times before is displayed in blinking, and in the numerical segment, there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

After that, when the total number of outs in the first game section reaches 300 before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the first game section ends and the second game section starts, but with the display switching time, Until a certain 5 seconds elapse, the display of the normal base value until then continues.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed in a blinking display mode on the information display 113. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the third identification information "b3." indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the first segment identification information "bL." indicating the current game section is blinked on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "23" is illuminated on the numerical segment. It

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, the identification segment is blinkingly displayed with the second identification information "b1." indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the third identification information "b2." indicating that it is the game section two times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section becomes 6000 or more, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is 5 seconds which is the display switching time. It will switch in order as time passes.

Thus, even if the game section is switched while the normal base value of the predetermined game section is being displayed, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses. The display of the normal base value does not end halfway due to the switching of the game section, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to recognize the normal base value.

Further, even if the game section is switched, instead of starting from the display of the normal base value of the current game section, the display order up to that point is taken over (for example, the normal base of the game section two times before). When the game section is switched during the display of the value, the normal base value displayed next becomes the normal base value of the game section three times before), so that the normal base value of each game section is changed by switching the game section. The display order does not suddenly change, and it becomes possible to easily recognize the normal base value of each game section.

(Display example 6 of information display)
Display Example 6 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a display example when the display mode of the normal base value of the current game section is switched during the second game section.

First, in the second game section, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the first segment identification information "bL." indicating the current game section is blinked on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "36" is illuminated on the numerical segment. It

After that, if the total number of outs in the second game section becomes 6000 or more before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, it becomes possible to calculate a highly reliable normal base value and display the normal base value. Although the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the normal base value is normally displayed in the blinking display mode until the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the identification segment is blinkingly displayed with the second identification information "b1." indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before (here, before the occurrence of the game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b2.” indicating that it is a game section two times before is displayed in blinking, and in the numerical segment, there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before (before the game section occurs here) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the fourth identification information "b3." indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a lighting display mode. Specifically, the identification segment is lit up and displayed with the first identification information "bL." indicating that it is the current game section, and the numerical segment is lit up with the calculated normal base value "36". It

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section is 60000 and becomes the third game section, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is switched. Each time 5 seconds, which is the time, elapses, it is switched in order.

In this way, when it becomes possible to display a credible normal base value, the display mode of the target normal base value (display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment) is switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize whether the normal base value has credibility or the normal base value does not have credibility.

Further, while the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the blinking display mode is continued until the display switching time elapses. Therefore, the same normal base value is not displayed in a plurality of display modes during the display switching time, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to recognize the normal base value.

(Display example 7 of information display)
A display example 7 of the information display device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a display example when switching from the second game section to the third game section.

First, in the second game section, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a lighting display mode. Specifically, the identification segment is lit up and displayed with the first identification information "bL." indicating that it is the current game section, and the numerical segment is lit up with the calculated normal base value "36". It

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the identification segment is blinkingly displayed with the second identification information "b1." indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

When the total number of outs in the second game section reaches 60,000 before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the second game section ends and the third game section starts and the normal base in each game section. Although the condition for switching the display of the value is satisfied, the display of the normal base value until then is continued until the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before (here, the first game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b2.” indicating that it is a game section two times before is displayed in blinking, and in the numerical segment, there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the fourth identification information "b3." indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" is lit up.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the third game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the first segment identification information “bL.” indicating the current game section is blinked on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value “08” is illuminated on the numerical segment. It

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a lighting display mode. Specifically, the identification segment is lit up and displayed with the second identification information "b1." indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment is lit up with the calculated normal base value "36". Is displayed.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the third game section becomes 6000 or more, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is 5 seconds which is the display switching time. It will switch in order as time passes.

In this way, when displaying the normal base value of the game section where the calculation result of the normal base value is not likely to change, in the same lighting display mode as the display mode when displaying the credible normal base value. Since it is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize that the calculation result of the normal base value is not likely to change.

In the present embodiment, the total number of outs in the first game section is 300. However, if the value is less than the total number of outs of 60,000 after the second game section, it is less than 300. It may be more or less. Further, the total number of outs after the second game section may be more or less than 60,000.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the information RWM area is cleared to 0 (initialized) due to a data abnormality, the game is started again from the first game section, but it is assumed that there is no first game section. You may make it start from two game sections.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the game section is switched during the display of the predetermined normal base value, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses, and the normal base value Although the display order is also inherited, it may be started from the display of the normal base value of the current game section at the time when the game section is switched, or after the display switching time has elapsed, the current game section is displayed. The normal base value may be displayed first.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the flashing continues until the display switching time elapses. Although the display mode is continued, it may be possible to immediately switch to the lighting display mode when the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is satisfied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal base value in each game section is sequentially displayed without an interval period (non-display period), but it is sequentially displayed with an interval period of a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) interposed. You can

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (at the time when the progress control of the game becomes possible), the lighting confirmation of the information display device 113 is surely confirmed. However, the lighting confirmation may not be performed after at least one of the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing for displaying the set value on the information display 113, or the setting change processing and the setting may be performed. When the confirmation processing is performed, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (at the time when the progress control of the game becomes possible), the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is performed. However, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, the lighting confirmation may be performed before the set value is displayed during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on for the first time (the set value is not saved) or when the set value saved at the second and subsequent power-on is abnormal, a non-recoverable error occurs and error information Is displayed, the error information displayed on the information display 113 may be different between the former case and the latter case.

(Main processing of payout controller)
Main processing of the payout controller 121 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a main process in the payout control unit 121. This main processing is performed by inputting the system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the payout CPU 121a.

First, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts at step H1, makes initial settings of the CPU such as setting of internal registers at step H2, and permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c at step H3.

The payout CPU 121a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the payout RAM 121c in step H4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step H5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted in step H6.

In step H7, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power-off instruction command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the power-off occurs is received. When the power cutoff command is received, the process proceeds to step H8, and when the power cutoff command is not received, the process of step H7 is repeatedly executed.

In step H8, the payout CPU 121a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step H9, loads the unpaid number of unpaid gaming balls from the payout counter of the payout RAM 121c, and in step H10. , A remaining payout amount designation command according to the loaded unpaid amount is transmitted to the main control board 110.

The payout CPU 121a clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) in step H11, prohibits RWM access in step H12, and completely cuts off the power supply thereafter. Wait until.

(Timer interrupt processing of payout control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the payout control unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process in the payout control unit. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the payout control unit 121.

First, in step H100, the payout CPU 121a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the payout RWM area, and in step H200, performs a timer update process. Specifically, the payout motor 95b driving time. And a process of updating various timer counters such as an interval time provided after paying out the game balls.

The payout CPU 121a performs a command analysis process in step H300. Specifically, a process of analyzing a command (transmitted from the main control board 110) stored in the reception buffer of the payout RWM area is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs an input control process in step H400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various switches such as the open detection switch 31a, the payout ball detection switch 95a, the full detection switch 32a, the ball presence detection switch 96a, the lending button detection switch, and the return button detection switch have been input. When there is an input, processing such as setting predetermined data is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs prize ball control processing in step H500. Specifically, the processing for paying out the game balls of the number of payouts corresponding to the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 from the payout device 95 is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs a ball lending control process in step H600. Specifically, when the lending button 20a is operated, one unit of game balls equivalent to 100 yen is provided while performing ball lending communication with a ball lender (not shown) arranged in parallel with the gaming machine 1. As a result, processing for paying out the game balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs a firing permission control process in step H700. Specifically, based on the reception of the firing permission designation command from the main control board 110, the firing permission flag is saved in the firing permission flag area set in the work area of the payout RAM 121c. In addition, it is determined whether or not the launch permission flag is saved, and the launch permission condition that is normally connected to the lending device (so-called ball lending machine) provided in parallel with the gaming machine 1 is satisfied, When the launch permission condition is satisfied, the launch control unit 122 is permitted to launch the game ball, and when the launch permission condition is not fulfilled, the launch control unit 122 is prohibited from firing the game ball. I do.

The payout CPU 121a performs an abnormality determination process in step H750. Specifically, the occurrence of a plate full error, a ball shortage error, etc. is determined based on input signals from the full detection switch 32a, the ball presence detection switch 96a, etc., and a plate full error designation command, a ball shortage error designation command, etc. Is performed to the effect control board 130.

The payout CPU 121a performs a data creation process in step H800. Specifically, external output data output from the game information output terminal board 90 (a prize ball schedule signal output by one pulse each time the condition for paying out 10 game balls is satisfied, 10 game balls A data creation process is performed to create data such as a winning ball payout signal, which is output by one pulse each time the payout is made, and drive data for driving the payout motor 95b.

The payout CPU 121a performs an output control process in step H900. Specifically, the process of outputting the signals such as the external output data and the drive data created in step H800, the process of outputting the various commands set in step H750 to the effect control board 130, and the like are performed. Note that the payout control unit 121 does not directly send a command to the effect control board 130, but the payout control section 121 sends a command to the main control board 110, and the command is sent from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. It may be done.

In step H1000, payout CPU 121a restores the information saved in step H100 to the register of payout CPU 121a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

Thus, in the payout control unit 121, when the launch permission designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received and normally connected to the lending device juxtaposed in the gaming machine 1, the launch control is performed. In order to allow the part 122 to shoot a game ball, the main control board 110 is not performing game progress control (for example, during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, setting confirmation mode) Even if there is, it is possible to launch the game ball by the launching device 26.

Further, in the payout control unit 121, since the prize ball control processing and the ball lending control processing are executed regardless of the control state of the main control board 110, the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game. Even during execution (for example, in the setting change mode, in the RWM clear mode, in the setting confirmation mode), it is possible to pay out the game balls.

Specifically, since the prize balls are paid out based on the reception of the payout number designation command from the main control board 110, the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game. During the execution of, the payout of prize balls is virtually impossible.

On the other hand, the payout of the rental ball is not performed based on the reception of the command from the main control board 110, but is performed based on the result of the lending communication with the lending device based on the operation of the lending button 20a by the player. Therefore, even if the main control board 110 is executing the initial setting process in which the progress control of the game is not performed, it is possible to pay out the rental ball.

In addition, when the main control board 110 is not controlling the progress of the game (during execution of the initial setting process), the firing control unit 122 may prohibit the firing of the game ball. In this case, when the main control board 110 is controlling the progress of the game (for example, after the initial setting process and the payout control process of step S500 of the timer interrupt process), the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c It is advisable to set the launch permission designation command to, and to transmit the launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in the output control processing of step S800 thereafter.

Further, when the main control board 110 is not controlling the progress of the game (during execution of the initial setting process), the payout of the game ball (at least one of the prize ball and the ball rental ball) may be prohibited. Good. In this case, the payout of the game balls is prohibited until the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, and when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, It is advisable to allow the payout of game balls.

(Modification of main processing of payout control unit)
A modified example of the main process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main process of the payout control unit 121.

In this modification, it is assumed that the backup power is supplied to the payout RAM 121c, and when the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the number of prize balls is added to the award ball number area of the payout RAM 121c, and this prize is awarded. It is premised that the payout control board 120 performs a process relating to the payout of prize balls based on the value of the number-of-balls region. Therefore, even when the power cutoff designation command is received from the main control board 110, the remaining payout number designation command is not transmitted to the main control board 110.

First, in step H1a, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts, in step H2a, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of internal registers, and in step H3a, permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c.

In step H4a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step H5a as the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step H7a as the first power-on.

The payout CPU 121a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of all the RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c in step H5a, and determines in step H6a whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c matches the checksum calculated in step H5a. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is not abnormal), the process proceeds to step H8a. If the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), in step H7a. , Initializes (clears 0) all the RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c.

The payout CPU 121a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step H8a, and permits all interrupts in step H9a.

In step H10a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. When the power restoration specification command is received (to restore the control state before power-off), the process proceeds to step H15a, and when the power restoration designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step H11a.

In step H11a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. If the power-on designation command is received (the control state before power-off is not restored), the process proceeds to step H12a, and if the power-on designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step H15a.

The payout CPU 121a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step H12a, clears an output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) in step H13a, and in step H14a. , The areas (including the prize ball number area) other than the launch permission flag area of the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c are initialized (cleared to 0).

In step H15a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power cutoff designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. If the power shutdown instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step H10a, and if the power shutdown instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step H16a.

The payout CPU 121a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step H16a, clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) in step H17a, and in step H18a. , The launch permission flag saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is cleared.

In step H19a, the payout CPU 121a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c, and saves the checksum in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine the data abnormality of the RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

In step H20a, the payout CPU 121a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is backed up (power is restored) in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c, and prohibits the RWM access in step H21a. Process and wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, even if the checksum is abnormal, unlike the main control board 110, without executing the non-recoverable error processing, the entire RWM area of the payout RAM 121c can be initialized and the payout control of the game ball can be executed. Therefore, the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game, but the payout control board 120 does not perform only the payout control of the game balls, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to avoid.

In addition, since the areas other than the firing permission flag area of the payout RAM 121c are initialized by receiving the power-on designation command from the main control board 110, when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized, the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c (prize ball (Including several areas) will also be initialized, the control state of the main control board 110 and the control state of the payout control board 120 can be made uniform, and the situation in which the gaming machine performs an unexpected operation can be avoided. Is possible.

As with the main RAM 110c, the payout RAM 121c performs a payout RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a payout program for performing payout control such as payout of game balls, and information control such as error determination. When the information program for execution is composed of an information RWM area used as a work (work area), when a power-on designation command is received, a payout RWM area and an information RWM Both areas will be initialized (cleared to 0).

(Main process of production control unit)
Main processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the main process in the effect control unit 130m. This main processing is performed by inputting the system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the sub CPU 130a.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts at step E1, makes initial settings of the CPU such as setting of internal registers at step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c at step E3.

In step E4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. If the backup flag has been saved, the power is restored and the process proceeds to step E5. If the backup flag has not been saved, the power is turned on for the first time and the process proceeds to step E8.

The sub CPU 130a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of all the RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c in step E5, and determines whether the checksum is normal in step E6. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c and the checksum calculated in step E5 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is not abnormal), the process proceeds to step E7. If the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step E8. Transfer processing.

In step E7, the sub CPU 130a initializes (resets) an area other than the history information area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the game history information saved in the history information area before the power is cut off (power failure) will be carried over after the power is restored.

In step E8, the sub CPU 130a initializes (resets) all RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the game history information saved in the history information area before the power is cut off (power failure) will not be taken over after the power is restored.

The sub CPU 130a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E9, permits all interrupts in step E10, and executes a sub random number updating process in step E11. I do. Specifically, a process of updating various random number values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed.

In step E12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the power cutoff designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. If the power cutoff command is received, the process proceeds to step E13. If the power cutoff command is not received, the process proceeds to step E11.

The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step E13, and clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) in step E14.

In step E15, the sub CPU 130a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c, and saves the check sum in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine the data abnormality of the RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

In step E16, the sub CPU 130a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area is backed up in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c (power is restored), prohibits RWM access in step E17, and thereafter. Wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, unlike the payout control unit, it is not performed to determine whether or not the power-on designation command is received and initialize the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. Even when the RWM clear is executed, it is possible to take over the game history information and provide the player with the game history information for a long period of time.

It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the power-on designation command has been received, and when the power-on designation command is received, the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c may be initialized. Further, only the history information area may be initialized instead of the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c.

(Timer interrupt process of production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130m. The timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the effect RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs the timer updating process in step E200. Specifically, a process of updating various timer counters necessary to execute the effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, a process of analyzing a command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the production RWM area is performed. The details of the command analysis process will be described later.

In step E400, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game, small hit game) are not executed, Based on the fact that the waiting time has elapsed, processing for executing a customer waiting effect for agitating the player's willingness to play a game is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs effect input control processing in step E500. Specifically, during the variable effect, based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the effective period, the operation notice effect that expects the special game to be executed is executed, or the special game is executed. A process for executing an operation-deciding effect of whether or not it is executed is performed, and in the customer waiting state, it is saved in the sub RAM 130c based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the effective period. Processing for displaying the played game history information on the image display device and for initializing (resetting) the game history information saved in the sub RAM 130c is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing in step E600. Specifically, the update of the effect mode (effect stage) in which the effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether or not a condition (change of game state, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach production that results are lost, etc.) is established, and if the update condition is established, a plurality of production modes are produced. Processing for updating to any of the modes is performed.

"Production mode" is a production mode A to C set in the low-probability non-short time gaming state, a production mode D to E set in the low-probability short time gaming state, and a production mode set in the high-probability short time gaming state. F to G are provided. In addition, when the power is turned on, when it is controlled to the low-probability non-time saving game state (for example, after changing the setting, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the setting, etc.), the first production mode is always the production mode A The production mode that is initially set when the power is turned on and is controlled to the low-accuracy time/short game state is always the production mode D, and is controlled to the high-precision time/short game state when the power is turned on. The production mode initially set is the production mode F.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game history update process in step E700. Specifically, a process for updating the game history information saved in the sub RAM 130c according to the progress of the game (variation effect, big hit game, small hit game execution) is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E800. Specifically, it performs a process for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area for effect in step E100 described above, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis process of production control unit)
The command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process in the effect control unit 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process moves to step E302, and if no command has been received, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is the setting change designation command, the process proceeds to step E303, and if it is not the setting change designation command, the process proceeds to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, a process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting change notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the setting change notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is the RWM clear designation command. If it is the RWM clear designation command, the process proceeds to step E305, and if it is not the RWM clear designation command, the process proceeds to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs an RWM clear notification process in step E305. Specifically, the notification instruction command for starting the RWM clear preparation notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the RWM clear preparation notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is the setting confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step E307, and if it is not the setting confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process in step E307. Specifically, a process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. If it is the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command, the process proceeds to step E309, and if it is not the power-on designation command or power restoration designation command, the process proceeds to step E310.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power ON notification process in step E309. Specifically, when the received command is the power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the above-described power-on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the received command is the power restoration specification command. If so, a process of setting the notification instruction command for executing the above-described power restoration notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the power-on notification or the power recovery notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process proceeds to step E311. If it is not an error system designation command, the process proceeds to step E312.

"Error system designation command" includes non-recoverable error designation command, incorrect winning award error designation command, abnormal winning award error designation command, magnetic error designation command, radio wave error designation command, door opening error start designation command, door opening error end designation This includes commands and operation error specification commands.

The sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process in step E311. Specifically, the error notification according to the type of the received error designation command (unrecoverable error notification, incorrect winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification Etc.) is executed to set the notification instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is the customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step E313, and if it is not the customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect preparation process in step E313. Specifically, a customer waiting effect standby flag and a customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) before starting the customer waiting effect are set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, in the above-mentioned customer waiting effect control processing, the customer waiting effect waiting flag and the customer waiting time are referred to and the processing for executing the customer waiting effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a game state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E315, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E316.

The sub CPU 130a executes a game state setting process in step E315. Specifically, the game state stored in the sub RAM 130c is updated to the game state according to the game state designation command. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step E317. If it is not a special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step E318.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a pending quantity update process. Specifically, a process of updating the special figure holding number stored in the sub RAM 130c and setting a production instruction command for increasing or decreasing the holding icon displayed on the image display device in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. To do. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for increasing or decreasing the hold icon displayed on the image display device is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a start mouth prize designation command. If the command is a starting mouth winning designation command, the received starting mouth winning designation command (special figure planned variation pattern) is set in the pre-read storage area of the sub RAM 130c, which will be described later, and the process proceeds to step E319 to specify the starting mouth winning designation. If it is not a command, the process proceeds to step E320.

The "prefetch storage area" is a first prefetch storage unit for sequentially storing prefetch information based on the first start mouth winning designation command (special figure planned variation pattern, etc.), and hold information based on the second start mouth winning designation command. Is divided into a second pre-reading storage unit for sequentially storing the pre-reading information, and a first pre-reading unit for storing pre-reading information corresponding to the variable display (fluctuation effect) being executed. The storage unit and the second prefetch storage unit are respectively divided into first to fourth storage units.

The first to fourth storage units of the first look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described first special figure determination information holding storage area, respectively, and receive the first start mouth prize designation command. Then, the readahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the first special figure reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to move (shift) to a storage unit with a smaller number every time the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-mentioned second special figure determination information holding storage region, respectively, and receive the second starting opening winning award designation command. Then, the read-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the second special figure reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to move (shift) to a storage unit with a smaller number every time the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the special symbol determination information execution storage region described above, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first prefetch storage unit The readahead information that is moved (shifted) is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the readahead information that is moved (shifted) from the first storage unit of the second readahead unit is stored. It

In step E319, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetching effect determination process. Specifically, expect a jackpot game to be executed by performing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols (suggest that the jackpot game is executed) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is determined, and the type of the pre-reading effect to be executed is determined, and a process for setting the effect instruction command to execute the pre-reading effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the prefetching effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

As the look-ahead effect, a hold icon displayed on the image display device or an icon change effect for displaying the icon in a special display mode different from the normal display mode, or a predetermined effect during one or more variable displays (fluctuation effects). There is a look-ahead continuous announcement effect to be executed.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E321. If it is not a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E322.

The sub CPU 130a performs a symbol data determination process in step E321. Specifically, a process for determining an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, an arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line, or the like is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the command is the special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E323. If it is not the special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E326.

The sub CPU 130a performs a change effect pattern determination process in step E323. Specifically, based on a special figure fluctuation pattern specified by the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and a fluctuation effect pattern determination table (not shown), a fluctuation that is an effect mode of the fluctuation effect executed by the effect device including the image display device. The effect pattern is determined, and the effect instruction command for executing the variable effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the variable effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a notice effect determination process in step E324. Specifically, based on the variation effect pattern determined in step E323, a jackpot announcement effect that causes the jackpot game to be executed (indicates that the jackpot game may be executed) is executed. Whether or not to decide the type of the jackpot notice effect to be executed, the process of setting the effect instruction command for executing the jackpot notification effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the jackpot notice effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect execution process. Specifically, a process of setting a production instruction command for starting the prefetching effect determined in the prefetching effect determination process of step E319 or changing the effect mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the prefetching effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E326, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a symbol confirmation command. If it is the symbol confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E327, and if it is not the symbol confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E328.

The sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing in step E327. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the temporarily stopped state and ending the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for ending the variable effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E328, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designation command. If the command is the special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E329, and if it is not the special game system designation command, the command analysis process this time is ended.

The "special game system designation command" includes a big hit opening designation command, a big hit round designation command, a big hit ending designation command, a small hit opening designation command, a small hit ending designation command, and the like.

In step E329, the sub CPU 130a performs a special game effect determination process. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, a process of setting the effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the big hit game or the small hit game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. In the case of the designated command, the process of setting the production instruction command for determining the round effect of the round game and executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the ending instruction command, the jackpot game or Processing for determining an ending effect of the small hit game and setting an effect instruction command for executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

(Modification of main process of production control unit)
A modified example of the main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the main process in the effect control unit 130m. In this modified example, it is premised that the backup power is not supplied to the sub RAM 130c and the game history information before the power is cut off is not taken over after the power is restored.

First, in step E1a, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts, in step E2a, the CPU is initialized such as setting the internal register, and in step E3a, the access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is permitted.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4a, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5a. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted in step E6a.

The sub CPU 130a performs a sub random number updating process in step E7a. Specifically, a process of updating various random number values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Main processing of integrated control unit)
Main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed by inputting the system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the overall CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, initial setting of the CPU such as setting of internal registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c (clear to 0), and CTC (counter timer circuit for generating a timer interrupt). In step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

The overall CPU 141a performs an adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the image display device (the first image display device 70, the first image display device 70, the first image display device 70, the first image display device 70, A process for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the two-image display device 71) and switching the adjustment mode for adjusting the volume and the light amount is performed. The details of the adjustment mode switching process will be described later.

The overall CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player, the sound output device 9 outputs the signal. Processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound. The details of the volume adjustment processing will be described later.

The overall CPU 141a performs a light amount adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, based on a detection signal (a lower button detection signal, an upper button detection signal) from a four-way key detection switch 19a which detects an operation of the four-way key 19 which can be operated by the player, an image display device (first image) A process for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

In addition, not only the light amount of the backlight of the image display device (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) is adjusted, but the light amount of the LEDs provided in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 is adjusted. May be adjusted together.

The overall CPU 141a performs eco-mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode in which the light amount of the backlight of the image display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is reduced to reduce power consumption is performed. ..

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m has been received. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

In step T9, the overall CPU 141a performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, a process of determining an animation pattern from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

The overall CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the frame switching flag indicating the frame update timing for updating the display image on the image display device is set in the overall RAM 141c. If there is a frame switching flag, the process proceeds to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process proceeds to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set in a V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 described later. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs a scene update process in step T13. Specifically, the scene switching counter, the wait frame counter, and the frame counter, which are updated in the V blank interrupt process to be described later, are referred to and the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. Then, the processing of updating the address of the sound scene is performed based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

In step T14, the overall CPU 141a performs drawing control processing. Specifically, in accordance with the priority order (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, the drawing control command group is formed from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address. A display list is generated, the display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer and also displays the images (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer. The process of displaying on the (first image display device, second image display device 71) is performed.

The overall CPU 141a performs a voice control process in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating a voice control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting the voice control command to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) is performed.

As a result, the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) performs a process of outputting various effect sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the voice output device 9. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

(Command reception interrupt process of integrated control unit)
The command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141. This command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving various commands transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

First, the overall CPU 141a performs a command reception process in step T30. Specifically, when the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m is received, the processing is stored in the reception buffer of the general RAM 141c. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt process this time ends.

(V blank interrupt process of integrated control unit)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141. The V blank interrupt process is executed each time the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) is finished (about 33 milliseconds) after the display of the effect image for one frame is completed (about 33 milliseconds).

First, the overall CPU 141a performs a counter updating process in step T50. Specifically, a process of updating the counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) used in the animation control process and the like by +1 is performed.

In step T51, the overall CPU 141a performs frame buffer switching command processing. Specifically, the image control unit 145 (VDP) is instructed to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM. As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 milliseconds), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame". It will be switched to "buffer" alternately.

In step T52, the overall CPU 141a sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched to a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c, and ends the V blank interrupt process this time. The frame switching flag is referred to in step T11 of the main processing of the overall control unit 141.

(Adjustment mode switching process of integrated control unit)
The adjustment mode switching process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the adjustment mode switching process of the overall control unit 141.

First, in step T4-1, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the adjustment mode for adjusting the volume and the light amount has been set in the overall RAM 141c. If the adjustment mode has not been set (this process is first executed after the power is turned on), the process proceeds to step T4-3. If the adjustment mode has been set, the process proceeds to step T4-2. Transfer.

In step T4-2, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the state of the changeover switch 22 has changed. Specifically, the current state of the changeover switch 22 is compared with the previous state of the changeover switch 22 stored in the general RAM 141c in step T4-5 described later. If the state of the changeover switch 22 has changed, the process is moved to step T4-3 to set the adjustment mode, and if the state of the changeover switch 22 has not changed, the adjustment mode is not set. Then, the adjustment mode switching process this time is ended.

In step T4-3, the overall CPU 141a selects the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59(b), and in step T4-4, the adjustment mode (modes 1 to 16) corresponding to the switch position of the changeover switch 22, the reference. The information and the power saving mode (ON, OFF) are specified and set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c. The reference information includes whether or not the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted using the cross key 19, the adjustment range of the volume value in the volume adjustment, the initial value of the volume value of the effect sound, and the backlight of the image display device using the cross key 19. Of the light amount adjustment range, the adjustment range of the light amount value in the light amount adjustment, and the initial value of the light amount value of the backlight.

In step T4-5, the overall CPU 141a sets the current state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c, and ends the adjustment mode switching process this time. The state of the changeover switch 22 set here is referred to in step T4-2.

(Changeover switch and adjustment mode selection table)
The changeover switch 22 and the adjustment mode selection table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59(a) is a diagram showing the external appearance of the changeover switch 22, and FIG. 59(b) is a diagram showing an adjustment mode selection table.

As shown in FIG. 59A, the changeover switch 22 is rotatably (360 degrees) pivotally supported with respect to the switch body 22a having a plurality of (for example, 16) selection terminals inside. It is a non-shorting type rotary switch having an operating section 22b that operates, and when the operating section 22b is rotated, the selection terminal to which the common terminal of the operating section 22b is connected is changed and the switch is switched (switch position is changed. To do).

Further, 16 scales (0 to F) indicating the position (contact point) of the selection terminal to which the common terminal is connected are provided on the upper surface of the switch body 22a, and the common terminal is connected to the operation portion 22b. An arrow indicating the selection terminal is provided. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the state of the switch (switch position) by the scale of the switch body 22a and the arrow of the operation portion 22b.

The changeover switch 22 may be configured by a slide switch that opens and closes the contacts by linearly sliding the operation unit, or a DIP switch that changes the contacts by operating any of the plurality of operation units. You may comprise by.

As shown in FIG. 59B, in the adjustment mode selection table, the switch position (0 to F) of the changeover switch 22, the adjustment mode (modes 1 to 16), and the reference information (volume adjustment possibility, volume value adjustment). The range, volume initial value, light quantity adjustment availability, light quantity value adjustment range, light quantity initial value) are associated with the power saving mode settings.

For example, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is "1", "mode 2" is set as the adjustment mode, "possible (variable)" is set as the volume adjustment possibility, and "1" is set as the volume value adjustment range. 5" is set, "1" is set as the volume initial value, "possible (variable)" is set as the light amount adjustment possibility, "1 to 5" is set as the light amount value adjustment range, and "light amount initial value" is set. "1" is set, and "OFF" is set as the power saving mode.

The first feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59(b) is that volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible (variable) in adjustment modes 1 to 6 in which the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is in the range of 0 to 5. In the adjustment modes 7 to 11 in which the switch position is set to the range of 6 to A, the volume adjustment is possible (variable), but the light amount adjustment is set to impossible (fixed), and the adjustment mode 12 in which the switch position is in the range of B to F. In Nos. 16 to 16, the volume adjustment is impossible (fixed) but the light amount adjustment is possible (variable). By doing so, it becomes possible to select (set) whether or not to adjust the volume and the amount of light by roughly operating the changeover switch 22, and the convenience when the game shop staff operates is improved.

The second feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59(b) is that the volume initial value and the light amount initial value are set by switching the adjustment mode by operating the changeover switch 22. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the volume (value) and the light amount (value) also by operating the changeover switch 22, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game shop staff.

The third feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59B is that the power saving (eco) mode is set to OFF in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 and the adjustment modes 12 to 16, and the adjustment modes 7 to 11 are set in the adjustment modes 7 to 11. The setting of the power saving (eco) mode is set to ON, and it is possible to set ON/OFF of the power saving mode by operating the changeover switch 22. By doing so, it is possible to set whether the power saving mode is ON or OFF depending on the intention of the gaming shop side, and it is possible to control the power consumption of the gaming machine 1 to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the operating cost of the entire gaming shop.

(Circuit configuration of the voice control unit)
A circuit configuration centering on the voice control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration centering on the voice control unit 148.

As shown in FIG. 60, the voice control unit 148 compresses the general control unit 141 that outputs various voice control commands related to voice output to the voice control unit 148 and various voice data (effect sound, system sound). A voice ROM 149 or the like which is stored as data is connected.

A control unit 148a that outputs output control commands (decoding unit control command, volume control command, etc.) related to voice data and volume based on the voice control command transmitted from the overall control unit 141 to the voice control unit 148, and a control unit. A plurality of audio channels (ch0 to ch39) to which the output control command output from 148a is input, a mixer 148d that mixes and outputs audio signals output from each of the plurality of audio channels, and a mixer 148d that outputs The audio signal processing unit 148e that performs predetermined audio processing (equalization, effect processing, panning, looping, etc.) on the generated signal, an operational amplifier 148f as an amplification device, and an audio signal that is a digital signal is converted into an analog signal. The audio output device 9 is provided with a D/A conversion unit 148g.

The plurality of audio channels includes a fixed channel group in which a plurality of fixed channels used to output the notification sound are set, and a variable channel group in which a plurality of variable channels used to output the effect sound are set. , Decoding units 148b0 to 148b39 for performing processing (reading/expansion of audio data from the audio ROM 149, reproduction start, reproduction pause, reproduction end) according to the input decoding unit control command, and an input volume control command Channel volume control units for performing processing (output volume setting, fade-in, fade-out) according to the above.

The decoding unit displays "playback status (playing, waiting)" indicating whether or not audio is being played back on the audio channel, and "priority (high, medium) which is the priority of the audio being played on the audio channel. , Low)”, and “sound number” which is a number for specifying the sound to be reproduced/reproduced.

In the channel volume control section, "volume", which is the output amount (percentage of the maximum volume) of the audio currently being played on the audio channel, and whether fade-in/fade-out is set for the audio currently playing on the audio channel Status information such as "fade status", which is information about whether or not these are completed, is included.

Therefore, the control unit 148a can always grasp the processing status of these audio channels by regularly acquiring status information from the audio channel decoding unit and the channel volume control unit.

The voice ROM 149 stores a plurality of voice data (phrase data) such as a background sound (BGM), a sound effect, and a notification sound used in the game machine as compressed digital data. As a method of compressing audio data, for example, modified discrete cosine transform or the like can be used, but the method is not limited to this, and the audio data may not be compressed.

(Audio channel configuration)
The configuration of the audio channel of the audio control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the structure of the audio channel of the audio control unit 148.

As shown in FIG. 61, of the plurality of audio channels (0ch to 39ch) included in the audio control unit 148, 6 audio channels of 0ch to 5ch are fixed channels that are fixed for use of the notification sound. , It cannot be used for directing sound. On the other hand, 34 audio channels of 6ch to 39ch are variable channels used for effect sound, and when outputting effect sound, the control unit 148a causes the audio channels of 6ch to 39ch to be vacant. Is selected and used for reproducing the audio data instructed by the overall control unit 141.

In this way, since a plurality of audio channels are distinguished into a fixed channel for notification sound and a variable channel for effect sound, for example, a serious (high priority) error such as a magnetic error has occurred in the gaming machine 1. In this case, it is possible to easily give priority to and output the notification sound by muting or stopping the effect sound output from the variable channel. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of which channel is used to output the effect sound, and the audio channel can be efficiently used.

(Voice management table)
The voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the voice management table, the sound number of the voice data, the type of the voice data, the output format (stereo, monaural) of the voice data, the priority of the voice data, and the output volume of the voice data are stored. They are associated with each other, and the explanation of the system sound is described for reference.

The sound numbers “1” to “12” are notification sounds related to the security of the gaming machine 1, the output format is “monaural”, and the priority is set to “high”, “medium”, or “low”. Some are output with a fixed volume (MAX volume corresponding to the volume value “5”), and some are output depending on the volume value.
The sound numbers “13” to “100” are effect sounds related to effects on the gaming machine 1, the output format is “monaural” or “stereo”, the priority is set to “low”, and the volume is all set. The volume is output depending on the value.
The sound numbers “101” to “105” are notification sounds related to the adjusted sound volume, the output format is “monaural”, the priority is set to “low”, and all sound volumes depend on the sound volume value. Is output.

The “power-on notification sound” is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c (payout RAM 121c) is initialized (setting change, RWM clear). ).
The “power restoration notification sound” is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is restored.
The “non-recoverable error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until the power is turned off when an unrecoverable error occurs in which the progress of the game is stopped in the main control board 110.
"Unauthorized winning error sound", the game ball is won in the second start opening 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or the game ball is won in the big winning hole when not in the special game (big hit game, small hit game) This is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until the power is turned off when an illegal prize winning error such as a hit occurs.
"Abnormal winning error sound" is output until the power is turned off when an abnormal winning error occurs in which the number of gaming balls won at various winning openings does not match the number of gaming balls discharged from the winning ball flow path that causes the winning balls to flow down. This is a notification sound (error sound).

The “magnetic error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when a magnetic error that detects an abnormal magnetic force is generated by the magnetic detection sensor 55a.
The “radio wave error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when a radio wave error that detects an abnormal radio wave is generated by the radio wave detection sensor 56a.
The "door opening error sound" is a notification sound (error sound) that is output over the opening period when a door opening error that detects the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is detected by the opening detection switch 31a. Is.
The "setting key switch error sound" means that the setting key switch 112a is in the OFF state again when a setting key error occurs in which the setting key switch 112a is switched from the OFF state to the ON state while the game progress control is being performed. It is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until it becomes.
The "clear switch error sound" is a notification that is output for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when a clear switch error occurs in which the RWM clear switch 111a is operated while the progress control of the game is being performed. It is a sound (error sound).
The "dish full error sound" is output over the period when the game ball is full when a plate full error that detects that the lower plate 12 is full of the game ball is generated by the full detection switch 32a. This is a notification sound (error sound).
"Right hitting error sound" is a right hitting error in which a game ball is detected at the universal figure gate 44 or the second starting opening 47 in a period (for example, a normal gaming state) in which right hitting toward the right game area should not be performed. At this time, it is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

It should be noted that a priority is set for the notification sound in accordance with the degree of importance of the security abnormality (error), and the priority is set to be higher for an abnormality that leads to fraudulent activity. Therefore, when a plurality of security anomalies with different priorities occur at the same time, it is controlled so that only one notification sound with a high priority is heard. For example, when the door opening error sound of the sound number “8” is output, and the magnetic error of the sound number “6” occurs, the door opening error sound of the sound number “8” is muted as an inaudible sound ( Mute) and output magnetic error sound. Then, when the output period of the magnetic error sound elapses, the output of the magnetic error sound is stopped, and if the output period of the door open error has not elapsed, the volume of the door open error sound is restored to the volume before the mute. Has become.

Therefore, even if a security abnormality (error) of a low priority sound number occurs while outputting a notification sound of a high priority sound number, the notification sound of a low priority sound number should not be output. become. Further, when a security abnormality (error) having the same priority occurs, a notification sound corresponding to the security abnormality (error) generated later is output.

Further, while outputting the effect sound (BGM, etc.) and the volume notification sound at the audible volume, the notification sound with the output volume set to the fixed volume (volume value “5”) with the priority “high” or “medium” In the case of starting the output of, the current volume value saved in the volume value area of the general RAM 141c is saved (saved) in the save area of the general RAM 141c, and then the current volume value is inaudible. By setting "0" and outputting the volume change command to the voice control unit 148, the effect sound (BGM or the like) or the volume notification sound is output at an inaudible volume.

Also, during output of the production sound (such as BGM) and the volume notification sound at the inaudible volume, the output volume is set to the fixed volume (volume value “5”) and the priority level is “high” or “medium”. When the sound output is ended, the effect sound (BGM or the like) is generated by returning the volume value saved in the save area of the general RAM 141c to the volume value area and outputting the volume change command to the voice control unit 148. The volume notification sound is output at the original volume. By doing so, it becomes easier for the game store clerk or the player to hear the notification sound.

(Volume adjustment process of integrated control unit)
Volume control processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the volume adjustment processing of the overall control unit 141.

First, in step T5-1, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjustment set in the overall RAM 141c is possible (variable). If the volume adjustment is possible, the process proceeds to step T5-2. If the volume adjustment is not possible (impossible), it is determined that the volume adjustment based on the operation of the cross key 19 cannot be performed. Move processing to -19.

In step T5-2, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not a security abnormality notification sound having a priority of "medium" or higher is being output. When the alarm sound of the security abnormality having the priority level of "middle" or higher is being output, the processing is shifted to step T5-19 assuming that the volume adjustment based on the operation of the cross key 19 cannot be performed, and the priority level is "middle". When the above-described security abnormality notification sound is not being output, the process proceeds to step T5-3.

In step T5-3, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not it is during the volume adjustable period. Specifically, the volume adjustment period is during the customer waiting state and the variation production, and the volume adjustment period is during the light amount adjustment. If it is during the volume adjustable period, it is determined that the volume can be adjusted based on the operation of the cross key 19, and the process is moved to step T5-4. If not during the volume adjustable period, the operation of the cross key 19 is performed. Since it is not possible to adjust the volume based on, the process proceeds to step T5-19.

In step T5-4, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 have been operated. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operation signal is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If the left or right button of the arrow key 19 is operated, the process proceeds to step T5-10. If the left or right button of the arrow key 19 is not operated, the process proceeds to step T5-5.

In step T5-5, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the display of special symbols and the special game (big hit game, small hit game) are currently in the waiting state for customers. If it is in the customer waiting state, the process proceeds to step T5-6. If it is not in the customer waiting state, the process proceeds to step T5-15.

In step T5-6, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not non-display of a volume-based image described later has continued for 5 seconds in the customer waiting state. If the volume-based image has not been displayed for 5 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-7. If the volume-based image has not been displayed for 5 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-8. Transfer.

The “volume system image” is a volume adjustment guide image for notifying that the volume can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19, or the volume value by notifying the current volume value and operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19. For example, an image during volume adjustment for guiding that the value is adjusted.

In step T5-7, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the volume adjustment guide image in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs the processing for displaying the volume adjustment guide image on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71).

In step T5-8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the cross key 19 in the customer waiting state has not been operated for 20 minutes. If the cross key 19 has not been operated for 20 minutes, it is determined that it is not possible to determine whether or not the previous player has finished the game, and the process proceeds to step T5-15, and the cross key 19 is not operated. When it has continued for 20 minutes, in step T5-9, it is determined that the previous player has finished the game, and the current volume value is reset to the initial value of the volume value set in the general RAM 141c.

In step T5-10, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed. If the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-14 to switch to the volume adjusting image. If the volume adjustment guide image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-11. ..

In step T5-11, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume-adjusted image is being displayed. If the volume-adjusting image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-12 to adjust the volume, and if the volume-adjusting image is not being displayed, the step is performed to display the volume adjustment guide image. The process is transferred to T5-14.

In step T5-12, the overall CPU 141a performs a volume changing process for changing the volume value. Specifically, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, the volume value is subtracted by 1 if the volume value stored in the general RAM 141c is not the lower limit value, and the right button of the cross key 19 is operated. If there is, the volume value is incremented by 1 if it is not the upper limit of the volume value stored in the general RAM 141c, and the volume change flag is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c. As a result, the presence or absence of the volume change flag is referred to in the above-described voice control process, the volume change command is output to the voice control unit 148, and the volume of the effect sound being output is changed.

In step T5-13, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the volume notification sound according to the current volume value in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the voice control unit 148 performs a process for outputting the volume notification sound corresponding to the current volume value from the voice output device 9.

In step T5-14, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the volume-adjusted image according to the current volume value in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image controller 145 displays the volume-adjusted image (in place of the volume adjustment guide image when the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed) on the image display device (first image display device 70 or second image display device). The processing for displaying in 71) will be performed. When this process ends, the current volume adjustment process ends.

In step T5-15, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume-adjusted image is being displayed. When the volume-adjusted image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-16 to determine whether or not the condition for deleting the volume-adjusted image is satisfied, and the volume-adjusted image is displayed. If it is not in the middle, the current volume adjustment processing is ended.

In step T5-16, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the effect button 17 has been operated. If the effect button 17 is operated, the process proceeds to step T5-18, and if the effect button 17 is not operated, the process proceeds to step T5-17.

In step T5-17, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds. If the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-18. If the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds, the volume-adjusted image is not erased. This time the volume adjustment processing ends.

In step T5-18, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the volume-adjusted image set in the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs processing for deleting the volume-adjusted image displayed on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71). When this process ends, the current volume adjustment process ends.

In step T5-19, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not a volume image (volume adjustment guide image, volume adjustment image) is being displayed. If the volume image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-20. If the volume image is not being displayed, the current volume adjustment process is terminated.

In step T5-20, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the volume image (volume adjustment guide image, volume adjustment image) set in the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs processing for deleting the volume-based image displayed on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device). When this process ends, the current volume adjustment process ends.

Although the description of the light amount adjustment process is omitted in the present embodiment, the basic process flow is different from the volume adjustment process in that the notification sound is output after the light amount value is changed. Are the same, it is only necessary to read "volume" and "light amount" in the volume adjustment processing.

(Specific example when the volume is adjusted while waiting for customers)
A specific example of the case where the volume adjustment is performed in the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIG. 64. The basic flow is the same when the light amount is adjusted.

Here, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, the adjustment mode, reference information, and power saving mode settings corresponding to the switch position “2” are set in the general RAM 144, and the volume value is It is assumed that the light amount value is set to "2 (volume 40%)" and the light amount value is set to "3 (light amount 80%)".

At this time, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the up/down/left/right buttons of the cross key 19 are activated during the effective period for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and the first image display device 70 is powered on. "135" which is the initial effect design 70a at the time of throwing in is displayed, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are also displayed.

After that, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 are disabled, and the volume shifts to a period in which the volume can be adjusted (volume is being adjusted). At this time, as shown in FIG. 64B, a volume-adjusted image OG corresponding to the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70.

When the left button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is decremented by 1 and becomes "1". At this time, as shown in FIG. 64C, the already-displayed volume-adjusted image OG is updated to the volume-adjusted image OG corresponding to the volume value “1” after subtraction, and the audio output device 9 outputs The volume notification sound “do” corresponding to the volume value “1” is output at a volume of 20% depending (corresponding) to the volume value “1”.

After that, when the production button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 10 seconds, the period during which the volume can be adjusted (volume is being adjusted) ends and the effective period for the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment comes. At this time, if the volume-adjusted image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is erased, and if the effect buttons 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 64(d). , A volume adjustment guide image OAG and a light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed.

Then, when 30 seconds have passed since the last operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 64(e), a customer waiting effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 outputs a BGM (customer waiting effect sound) corresponding to the customer waiting effect. Is output.

In this way, the volume-adjusted image OG (light-intensity-adjusted image) is not changed by operating the cross key 19 when the volume-adjusted image OG (light-intensity-adjusted image) is not displayed. Since the volume value is changed by operating the cross key 19 while being displayed, the volume adjustment (light intensity adjustment) can be performed after confirming the current volume value (light intensity value), which improves the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

(Specific example when volume adjustment is performed during fluctuation production)
A specific example of the case where the volume adjustment is performed during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIG. The basic flow is the same when the light amount is adjusted.

Here, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, the adjustment mode, reference information, and power saving mode settings corresponding to the switch position “2” are set in the general RAM 144, and the volume value is It is assumed that the light amount value is set to "2 (volume 40%)" and the light amount value is set to "3 (light amount 80%)".

In the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are activated during the effective period for volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, and the first image display device 70 , "135", which is the initial effect design 70a when the power is turned on, is displayed, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are also displayed.

After that, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60, the variation effect is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(b), in the first image display device 70, scrolling of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the BGM corresponding to the variable effect is changed to the volume value “2” from the audio output device 9. It is output at a volume of 20% depending on.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 are invalidated, and the period shifts to a period in which the volume can be adjusted (volume is being adjusted). At this time, as shown in FIG. 65C, a volume-adjusted image OG corresponding to the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70.

When the right button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is incremented by 1 to become "3". At this time, as shown in FIG. 65( d ), the already-displayed volume-adjusted image OG is updated to the volume-adjusted image OG corresponding to the added volume value “3”, and is output from the audio output device 9. The output BGM is output at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "3".

After that, when the production button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 10 seconds, the period during which the volume can be adjusted (volume is being adjusted) ends and the effective period for the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment comes. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(e), the volume-adjusted image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is erased.

As described above, since the volume adjustment (light intensity adjustment) can be performed by operating the cross key 19 even while the variation effect is being executed, the convenience of the player is improved and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) is not possible even at the start of the variable effect or at the end of the variable effect, but at the start of the variable effect or at the end of the variable effect, the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) is temporarily performed. ) May be disabled. In that case, the volume-adjusted image OG (light-intensity-adjusted image) may be erased, or only the volume adjustment (light-intensity adjustment) may be disabled while the image is displayed.

In addition, the volume adjustment image OG (light intensity adjustment image) is not displayed even while the variation effect is being executed, and the volume adjustment (light intensity adjustment) is performed without displaying the volume adjustment image OG (light intensity adjustment image). You may make it possible.

(Specific example when settings are changed)
A specific example in which the setting is changed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. 66(1) to 66(4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the waiting process for starting the other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63, the second special symbol hold The display device 64, the normal symbol hold display device 65, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the activation waiting process ends and shifts to the activation process, and at the timing of T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation is performed, the setting value is changed (the winning of the game ball). (Detection, error occurrence detection, etc. are not performed) Enter the setting change mode and send the setting change designation command. In addition, a setting change signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current set value (any one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display 113.

Then, at the timing of T4, when it is detected that the set value confirmation operation is performed, a power-on designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (such as winning detection of a game ball and detection of an error occurrence). It shifts to the game progress mode, and starts processing for calculating performance information (history information such as normal base value) (normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter, normal medium out number counter).

At this time, output of a power-on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) from the security signal terminal is started, and the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 , Displaying an initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is turned on) which is a predetermined loss, and displays a first special symbol hold indicator 63 and a second special symbol hold indicator The display 64 indicates that the special figure reservation number is “0”, and the information display 113 starts the lighting confirmation for turning all the 7-segment displays on.

After that, when the customer waiting state is detected at the timing of T5, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T6, when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses, the information display 113 displays. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

Next, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7 to T8, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, the payout device 95 pays out the prize ball (three game balls). The normal medium payout number counter is updated, and the display indicating that the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is the first special symbol hold number “1” is displayed, and the first special symbol memory designation command and the first start mouth winning designation command The command before change such as is transmitted.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special symbol reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "0", and the special display is stopped. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, a variation start command such as a special symbol designation command or a special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is displayed. Start.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the variable time elapses, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 and the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T12, when it is detected that the customer is waiting. , Send the customer waiting state designation command.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66(1) and FIG. 67, an operation example 1 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received will be described. 67(1-a) to (1-h) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 67(1-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67 (1-b)).

When the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting change mode for changing the setting is entered and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67 (1-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the power-on notification is started by shifting to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect. At this time, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ), a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 67 (1-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer is in the waiting state, but the power-on notification is continued, and the timing of T7 after the timing of T6. In, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on notification sound elapses, the output of the sound from the sound output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the initial effect design “135”, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 67 (1-e)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power-on notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started.

After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol memory designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (1-g)).

When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 67 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66 (2) and FIG. 67, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received will be described. 67(2-a) to (2-h) correspond to FIG. 66(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 67 (2-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67 (2-b)).

When the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting change notification for setting change notification is started and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power-on notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (2-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ), a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-e)).

Then, at the T9 timing after passing through the timings of T6 to T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. The number of the reserved 1st special figure is updated. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (2-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-g)).

When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 67(2-h)).

(Operation example 3 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66 (3) and FIG. 67, an operation example 3 on the side of the production control board 130 when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. explain. It should be noted that FIGS. 67(3-a) to (3-h) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 67 (3-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67 (3-b)).

When the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting change notification for setting change notification is started and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67 (3-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification, which should otherwise be executed, is not executed. Continue the setting change mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (3-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state designation command, which should otherwise be entered, is entered. Continue setting change mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (3-e)).

When the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T9 after the timings of T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c receives the command. The stored first special figure reservation number is updated, but the setting change mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. When it is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the voice output device 9, the fluctuating decorative light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, and the cross key 19 is operated. The volume and light intensity can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, the background image of the common effect mode A or the like is displayed, and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (3-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, on the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (3-g)).

When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 67 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 66 (4) and FIG. 67, an effect when the power-on designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. 67(4-a) to (4-h) correspond to FIG. 66(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 67(4-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67 (4-b)).

When the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting change notification for setting change notification is started and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67(4-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification, which should otherwise be executed, is not executed. Continue the setting change mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state designation command, which should otherwise be entered, is entered. Continue setting change mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-e)).

When the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T9 after the timings of T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c receives the command. The stored first special figure reservation number is updated, but the setting change mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. If the reception cannot be performed normally and a reception error occurs, the variation effect, which should otherwise be executed, is not executed and the setting change mode is continued. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the setting change mode is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuating effect which should otherwise be derived. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ), a background image or the like in the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 67 (4-h)).

In this way, the adjustment control mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 from the state where the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period during which the game shop staff can adjust the volume, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game shop side.

In addition, after the production control board 130 side shifts to the setting change mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the production progress mode, that is, a command for significantly changing the display image of the image display device) is normally performed. At the timing of reception, the setting change mode (setting change screen) ends and shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen). Therefore, it is possible to change the mode according to the change in the effect control by the effect control board 130. Become.

Also, at the timing of shifting from the setting change mode (setting change screen) to the effect progress mode (effect screen), the volume (or light amount) can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 (player). Therefore, it is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light amount while actually confirming the effect, and it is possible to provide an adjustment function that is kind to the player.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, 2 When the game ball is won in the starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50, the second big winning opening 53), the winning is invalid and the payout of the gaming ball is not performed, and the payout according to the winning is made. Since the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because the number is not collected and is not subject to the calculation of the normal base value, the game machine can be used only when the player can execute the game. Performance information (history information) can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting display screen is displayed on the image display device, if the game ball flows into the outlet 39, this inflow occurs. It becomes invalid, the number of outs according to this inflow is not collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because it is not subject to calculation of the normal base value. Therefore, the player plays the game. The performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored, and displayed only when it can be executed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device. When the game balls win the various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) while The payout of the game balls is made valid and the payout amount according to the win is collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 is changed as the target for calculation of the normal base value. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine, even if the appearance mode is not the game progress mode (production progress mode), and provide accurate performance information. It becomes possible.

In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device. If a game ball flows into the out port 39 while it is in progress, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs according to this inflow is collected and displayed on the information display 113 as a target for calculation of the normal base value. Since the normal base value that is changed may change, performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately calculated, stored, and displayed even when not in the game progression mode (production progression mode). It is possible to provide accurate performance information.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are not executed (error specification command is not transmitted). When the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (production screen) is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are made. Since the error notification becomes executable after execution (error specification command is sent), useless processing is not performed in situations where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during the setting change processing. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device. When it is, various error judgments are executed (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification is executed, so an error occurs even if it is not in the game progress mode (production progress mode) in appearance. Can be accurately notified. In this case, the display of the setting change screen may be ended by shifting to the effect progress mode, or the display of the setting change screen may be maintained without changing to the effect progress mode.

Note that when the setting change mode (setting change screen) is shifted to the effect progress mode (normal screen), even if the power-on notification is executed, the operation of the cross key 19 (player) adjusts the volume and the light amount ( Instead of enabling the setting, the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power-on notification sound ends. It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light amount by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when is completely finished.

Also, during the setting change mode, even if the special symbol memory designation command or the starting mouth winning designation command as a command before change is normally received, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but a special symbol memory designation command or start. You may make it shift to production progress mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is normally received.

Further, even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the setting change mode, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but may be shifted to the production progress mode at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good. Note that the symbol determination command may include information indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination, in this case, a production symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination (for example, "777" for a big hit, "246" for a loss, etc.). ) Is not displayed, but it is good to display the common initial effect design "135" when the power is turned on (low-probability non-time saving game state).

Also, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) that is transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is normally received, it shifts to the production progress mode and the normal screen (production screen ) Is not displayed (the variation effect is started), the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the setting change mode is continued and the setting change screen is displayed. In this case, by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the opening designation command next, it is preferable to shift to the production progress mode and display the normal screen (production screen).

The emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the setting change notification may be different from the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the power-on notification. This makes it easier to recognize which of the setting change notification and the power-on notification is being issued.

Also, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing), various error determinations (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error) are performed. In the case where it is executed, even if various errors occur and the error designation command is transmitted, the setting change notification is maintained and the error notification is restricted (restricted) in the image display device. It is advisable to set the error notification priority (importance) lower (lower) than the setting change notification.

(Specific example when RWM clear is performed)
A specific example in which the RWM clear is performed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. 68(1) to (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the waiting process for starting the other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63, the second special symbol hold The display device 64, the normal symbol hold display device 65, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the activation waiting process ends and shifts to the activation process, and when it is detected that the RWM clear operation is performed at the timing of T3, a predetermined area of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized. In order to do so (the winning detection of the game ball and the occurrence of an error are not detected), the mode is shifted to the RWM clear mode, and the RWM clear designation command is transmitted. Further, the RWM clearing signal is output from the security signal terminal.

Then, at the timing of T4, when it is detected that the RWM clear confirmation operation is performed, a power-on designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (the winning detection of the game ball, the occurrence of an error, etc. are detected. It shifts to the game progress mode, and starts processing for calculating performance information (history information such as normal base value) (normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter, normal medium out number counter).

At this time, output of a power-on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) from the security signal terminal is started, and the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 , Displaying an initial symbol which is a predetermined loss (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit), the first special symbol reservation display 63, the second special symbol reservation display 64, and the normal symbol reservation display 65 become a display showing that the special figure reservation number is "0", and the information display 113 starts lighting confirmation for turning all the 7-segment displays on.

After that, when the customer waiting state is detected at the timing of T5, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T6, when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses, the information display 113 displays. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

Next, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7 to T8, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, the payout device 95 pays out the prize ball (three game balls). The normal medium payout number counter is updated, and the display indicating that the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is the first special symbol hold number “1” is displayed, and the first special symbol memory designation command and the first start mouth winning designation command The command before change such as is transmitted.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special symbol reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "0", and the special display is stopped. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, a variation start command such as a special symbol designation command or a special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is displayed. Start.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the variable time elapses, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 and the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T12, when it is detected that the customer is waiting. , Send the customer waiting state designation command.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 68(1) and FIG. 69, an operation example 1 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received will be described. 69(1-a) to (1-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 68(a) to (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 69 (1-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (1-b)).

When the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear is entered to start the RWM clear preparation notification. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69 (1-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the power-on notification is started by shifting to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect. At this time, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, the background image of the common effect mode A and the like are displayed (see FIG. 69 (1-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer is in the waiting state, but the power-on notification is continued, and the timing of T7 after the timing of T6. In, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on notification sound elapses, the output of the sound from the sound output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the initial effect design "135", the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 69 (1-e)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power-on notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started.

After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol memory designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, on the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (1-g)).

When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, on the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 69 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (2) and FIG. 69, an operation example 2 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally will be described. 69(2-a) to (2-h) correspond to FIG. 68(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 69 (2-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (2-b)).

When the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear is entered to start the RWM clear preparation notification. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69 (2-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power-on notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. .. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (2-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 69 (2-e)).

Then, at the T9 timing after passing through the timings of T6 to T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. The number of the reserved 1st special figure is updated. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (2-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, on the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (2-g)).

When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 67(2-h)).

(Operation example 3 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 68(3) and FIG. 69, an operation example 3 on the side of the production control board 130 when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. explain. 69(3-a) to (3-h) correspond to FIGS. 68(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 69 (3-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (3-b)).

When the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear is entered to start the RWM clear preparation notification. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69 (3-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification, which should otherwise be executed, is not executed. Continue RWM clear mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (3-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state designation command, which should otherwise be entered, is entered. Instead, continue RWM clear mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (3-e)).

When the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T9 after the timings of T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c receives the command. The stored first special figure reservation number is updated, but the RWM clear mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command. When is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the voice output device 9, the fluctuating decorative light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, and the cross key 19 is operated. The volume and light intensity can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, the background image of the common effect mode A and the like are displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (3-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (3-g)).

When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 69 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 68 (4) and FIG. 69, an effect when the power-on designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. 69(4-a) to (4-h) correspond to FIG. 68(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 69 (4-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (4-b)).

When the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear is entered to start the RWM clear preparation notification. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69 (4-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification, which should otherwise be executed, is not executed. Continue RWM clear mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state designation command, which should otherwise be entered, is entered. Instead, continue RWM clear mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-e)).

When the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T9 after the timings of T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c receives the command. The stored first special figure reservation number is updated, but the RWM clear mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command. When the reception error occurs due to the inability to receive normally, the RWM clear mode is continued without executing the variation effect which should otherwise be executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the RWM clear mode is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuating effect which should otherwise be derived. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ), the background image of the common effect mode A and the like are displayed (see FIG. 69 (4-h)).

In this way, the adjustment control mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 from the state where the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period during which the game shop staff can adjust the volume, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game shop side.

In addition, after the production control board 130 side shifts to the RWM clear mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the production progress mode, that is, a command for significantly changing the display image of the image display device) is normally set. At the timing of reception, the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) ends and shifts to the production progress mode (normal screen), so that it is possible to perform mode transition according to changes in production control by the production control board 130. ..

In addition, at the timing of shifting from the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) to the effect progress mode (normal screen), the volume (or volume) and light amount can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 (player). The volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) while actually confirming the effect, and it becomes possible to provide an adjustment function that is kind to the player.

Also, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second When a game ball is won in the starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50, and the second big winning opening 53), the winning is invalidated and the payout of the gaming ball is not performed, and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning. Since the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 is not subject to calculation of the normal base value without being collected, the performance of the gaming machine only when the player can execute the game. Information (history information) can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, if the game ball flows into the outlet 39, this inflow is invalid. Therefore, the number of outs according to this inflow is not collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because it is out of the calculation of the normal base value. Therefore, the player executes the game. Performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored, and displayed only when possible, and accurate performance information can be provided.

In addition, because the production control board 130 did not receive the power-on designation command normally, the main control board 110 is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. If a game ball wins any of the various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) while playing When the game balls are paid out, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning is collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 can be changed as a target for calculation of the normal base value. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine, even if the appearance mode is not the game progress mode (production progress mode), and provide accurate performance information. Is possible.

In addition, because the production control board 130 did not receive the power-on designation command normally, the main control board 110 is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When a game ball flows into the out port 39 while the player is present, this inflow becomes valid, and the number of outs according to this inflow is collected and displayed on the information display 113 as a target for calculation of the normal base value. Since the normal base value may change, the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately calculated, stored, and displayed even if the appearance is not in the game progression mode (production progression mode). It becomes possible to provide accurate performance information.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are not executed (error specification command is transmitted). When the error notification is not executed, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the normal screen (production screen) is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are executed. Since (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification becomes executable, useless processing is not performed in a situation in which it is difficult to assume that a player's game or cheating is being performed during RWM clear processing. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Moreover, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) because the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. At this time, various error determinations are executed (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification is executed, so an error occurs even if it is not apparently in the game progress mode (production progress mode). It is possible to make an accurate notification. In this case, the display of the clear confirmation screen may be ended by shifting to the production progress mode, or the display of the clear confirmation screen may be maintained without shifting to the production progress mode.

Note that when the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) is switched to the effect progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount are adjusted (set) by the operation (player) of the cross key 19 even if the power-on notification is executed. ) Is not possible, but the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power-on notification sound is finished. It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 at the timing of complete completion.

Further, during the RWM clear mode, even if the special symbol memory designation command or the start mouth winning designation command as a command before change is normally received, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but a special symbol memory designation command or start. You may make it shift to production progress mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is normally received.

Moreover, even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the RWM clear mode, it is not prevented from shifting to the effect proceeding mode, but may be shifted to the effect proceeding mode at the timing when the symbol confirm command is normally received. Good.

Also, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) that is transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is normally received, it shifts to the production progress mode and the normal screen (production screen ) Is not displayed (the variation effect is started), the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the RWM clear mode is continued and the clear confirmation screen is displayed. In this case, by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the opening designation command next, it is preferable to shift to the production progress mode and display the normal screen (production screen).

Further, the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 in the RWM clear preparation notification may be different from the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 in the power-on notification. .. By doing so, it becomes easier to recognize which of the RWM clear preparation notification and the power-on notification is being issued.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing), various error determinations (abnormal winning error, incorrect winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error) are performed. In the case of execution, even if various errors occur and an error designation command is transmitted, the image display device maintains the RWM clear preparation notification and regulates (limits) the error notification. , It is preferable to set the error notification priority (importance) lower (lower) than the RWM clear preparation notification.

(Specific example when the control state of the game is restored)
A specific example of the case where the control state of the game is restored without confirming the setting when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 70(1) to (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side. Here, it is assumed that the low-probability non-time saving game state (normal game state) is restored.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the waiting process for starting the other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63, the second special symbol hold The display device 64, the normal symbol hold display device 65, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the activation waiting process ends and shifts to the activation process, and at the timing of T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation are not performed, the power supply is turned on. Process for transmitting performance information (history information such as normal base value) to control the progress of the game by sending a recovery designation command (normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter) , Update of the normal out counter is started).

At this time, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 have an initial symbol that is a predetermined loss (for example, a plurality of symbols constituting the display device). One of the LEDs is lit) is displayed), and the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator 64, and the normal symbol hold indicator 65 are special figure hold number "0" Is displayed, and the information display 113 starts the lighting confirmation for turning all the 7-segment displays on.

Then, at the timing of T4, when the customer waiting state is detected, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T5, when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses, the information display 113 displays. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

After that, at the timing of T8 after the timing of T6 to T7, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, the payout device 95 pays out the prize ball (three game balls) and the normal The medium payout number counter is updated, and the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol hold number is "1", such as the first special symbol memory designation command and the first starting mouth winning designation command. Send the pre-fluctuation command.

Next, at the timing of T9, when the first special symbol reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is “0”, and the special display is stopped. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, a variation start command such as a special symbol designation command or a special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is displayed. Start.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the variable time has elapsed, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60, and the symbol confirmation command is transmitted. At the timing of T11, it is detected that the customer is waiting. Then, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70(1) and 71, an operation example 1 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received will be described. 71(1-a) to (1-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 70(a) to (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71(1-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the power supply restoration notification is started by shifting to the production progress mode for performing the game production. At this time, the power output notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a power restoration screen indicating that the power is restored (see FIG. 71(1-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer wait state is entered, but the power restoration notification is continued. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the power restoration screen continues (see FIG. 71 (1-c)).

Next, at the timing of T6 after the timing of T5, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power restoration notification sound elapses, the output of the audio from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 71 (1-d)).

Then, at the timing of T7, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power restoration notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, in addition to the initial effect design and the background image, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (see FIG. 71 (1-e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 71 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (1-g)).

Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 71 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 70(2) and FIG. 71, an operation example 2 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally will be described. 71(2-a) to (2-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 70(a) to (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71(2-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error that cannot normally receive the power recovery specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 occurs, the power recovery notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. .. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71(2-b)).

After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 71 (2-c)).

Next, at the timing of T6 after the timing of T5, in the first image display device 70, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect design and the background image (FIG. 71 (2-d)).

Then, at the timing of T7, when the waiting time of the customer waiting effect elapses, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, the demo BGM is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 start the demo decoration light emission to attract the player's interest. Then, in the first image display device 70, a demonstration display effect for attracting the interest of the player is started in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (FIG. 71 (2-e). )reference).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number and finish the customer waiting production. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the initial effect design "135", the background image, and the like to additionally display the first hold icon.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 71 (2-f)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (2-g)).

When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 71 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 of production control board)
Next, referring to FIG. 70(3) and FIG. 71, an operation example 3 on the side of the production control board 130 when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. explain. 71(3-a) to (3-h) correspond to FIG. 70(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71 (3-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error that cannot normally receive the power recovery specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 occurs, the power recovery notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. .. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (3-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state, which should otherwise occur, does not shift to the customer waiting state. The command waiting state is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (3-c)).

Then, at the timing of T5 to T7, since no command is received from the main control board 110, the command waiting state is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71(3-d) and FIG. 71(3-e)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure stored in the sub RAM 130c. The pending number is updated, but the command waiting state continues. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. When normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the voice output device 9, the fluctuating decorative light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, and the cross key 19 is operated. The volume and light intensity can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, the background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 71 (3-f)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, on the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (3-g)).

Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 71 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 70(4) and FIG. 71, the production in the case where the power supply restoration designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. 71(4-a) to (4-h) correspond to FIGS. 70(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71(4-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error that cannot normally receive the power recovery specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 occurs, the power recovery notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. .. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71(4-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state, which should otherwise occur, does not shift to the customer waiting state. The command waiting state is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71(4-c)).

Next, at the timing of T8 after the timing of T5 to T7, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the sub RAM 130c. The 1st special figure reservation number which is remembered is renewed, but the command waiting state continues. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. If the reception cannot be performed normally and a reception error occurs, the variation effect, which should otherwise be performed, is not executed and the command waiting state is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71(4-f)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuating effect which should otherwise be derived. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (4-g)).

Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 71 (4-h)).

In this way, the adjustment control mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 from the state where the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period during which the game shop staff can adjust the volume, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game shop side.

In addition, after the production control board 130 side shifts to the command waiting state, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the production progress mode, that is, a command that significantly changes the display image of the image display device) is normally performed. At the timing of reception, the command waiting state (initial screen) is ended and the mode shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen). Therefore, it is possible to perform the mode change according to the effect control change by the effect control board 130.

Further, at the timing of shifting from the command waiting state (initial screen) to the production progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 (player). It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light amount while confirming the effect, and it is possible to provide an adjustment function that is kind to the player.

Note that when the command waiting state (initial screen) is switched to the production progress mode (normal screen), even if the power restoration notification is executed, the operation of the cross key 19 (player) adjusts (sets) the volume and the light amount. It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light amount by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power recovery notification sound is finished, instead of enabling the power recovery notification sound. It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 at the timing of ending.

Also, even if the special symbol memory designation command or the start mouth winning designation command as a command before change is normally received during the command waiting state, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but a special symbol memory designation command or start. You may make it shift to production progress mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is normally received.

Further, even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the command waiting state, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but may be shifted to the production progress mode at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

(Specific example when setting is confirmed)
A specific example in which the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. 72(1) to (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the side of the effect control board 130. Here, after confirming the setting, it is assumed that the low probability non-time saving game state (normal game state) is restored.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example of the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the waiting process for starting the other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63, the second special symbol hold The display device 64, the normal symbol hold display device 65, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the activation waiting process ends and the process shifts to the activation process, and when it is detected that the setting confirmation operation is performed at the timing of T3, the setting value saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is detected. The mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode for confirming, and the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted. Further, a setting confirmation signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current set value (any one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display 113.

Then, at the timing of T4, when it is detected that the confirmation end operation is performed, a power supply restoration designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (the winning detection of the game ball, the occurrence of an error, etc. are detected. ) The process proceeds to the game progress mode, and the process for calculating the performance information (history information such as the normal base value) (normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter, normal medium out number counter is updated) is started.

At this time, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 have an initial symbol that is a predetermined loss (for example, a plurality of symbols constituting the display device). One of the LEDs is lit) is displayed, and the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 become a display indicating that the special figure reservation number is "0", and the information display 113 Then, the lighting confirmation for turning on all the 7-segment display is started.

After that, when the customer waiting state is detected at the timing of T5, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T6, when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses, the information display 113 displays. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

After that, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7 to T8, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, the prize device (3 game balls) is paid out from the payout device 95 and the normal The medium payout number counter is updated, and the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol hold number is "1", such as the first special symbol memory designation command and the first starting mouth winning designation command. Send the pre-fluctuation command.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special symbol reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "0", and the special display is stopped. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, a variation start command such as a special symbol designation command or a special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is displayed. Start.

Next, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 to determine the symbol confirmation command, and at the timing of T12, it is detected that the customer is waiting. Then, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, an operation example 1 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received will be described with reference to FIGS. 72(1) and 73. Note that FIGS. 73(1-a) to (1-i) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to (i), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (1-a)).

When the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting is entered and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73 (1-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the power supply restoration notification is started by shifting to the production progress mode for performing the game production. At this time, the power output notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, on the first image display device 70, a power restoration screen indicating that the power is restored is displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer wait state is entered, but the power restoration notification is continued. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the power restoration screen continues (see FIG. 73 (1-d)).

Then, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T6, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power restoration notification sound elapses, the output of the audio from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial effect symbol "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power restoration notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect design and the background image (see FIG. 73 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number of holds. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (1-g)).

Then, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73(1-h)).

After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 73 (1-i)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 72(2) and FIG. 73, an operation example 2 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally will be described. 73(2-a) to (2-i) correspond to FIG. 72(a) to (i), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (2-a)).

When the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting is entered and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73 (2-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the power recovery notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (2-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial effect symbol "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 73 (2-d)).

Then, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T6, in the first image display device 70, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect design and the background image ( See FIG. 73(2-e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the waiting time for the customer waiting effect elapses, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, the demo BGM is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 start the demo decoration light emission to attract the player's interest. Then, in the first image display device 70, a demonstration display effect for attracting the interest of the player is started in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (FIG. 73 (2-f)). )reference).

Next, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure stored in the sub RAM 130c. The number of holdings is updated and the customer waiting production is ended. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the initial effect design "135", the background image, and the like to additionally display the first hold icon.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (2-g)).

Then, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (2-h)).

After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 73 (2-i)).

(Operation example 3 of production control board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 72(3) and FIG. 73, an operation example 3 on the side of the production control board 130 when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. explain. 73(3-a) to (3-i) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to (i), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (3-a)).

When the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting is entered and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73 (3-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the power recovery notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (3-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, shift to the customer waiting state which is supposed to shift. Continue setting confirmation mode without doing anything. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (3-d)).

Then, at the timing of T6 to T8, since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIGS. 73(3-e) to 73(3-f)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c The number is updated, but the setting confirmation mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command. When is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, the background image of the common effect mode A and the like are displayed, and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (3-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (3-h)).

When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 73 (3-i)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 72(4) and FIG. 73, an effect when the power supply restoration designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. 73(4-a) to (4-i) correspond to FIG. 72(a) to (i), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume), Further, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (4-a)).

When the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting is entered and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73 (4-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the power recovery notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to be illuminated in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (4-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, shift to the customer waiting state which is supposed to shift. Continue setting confirmation mode without doing anything. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (4-d)).

Then, at the timing of T6 to T8, since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the setting confirmation screen (see FIGS. 73(4-e) to 73(4-f)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c The number is updated, but the setting confirmation mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. If the reception cannot be performed normally and a reception error occurs, the variation effect, which should otherwise be performed, is not executed and the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 71 (4-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without deriving the result of the variation effect which should otherwise be derived. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (4-h)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common to the initial effect design "135" and power ON (low-probability non-time saving game state) ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 73 (4-i)).

In this way, the adjustment control mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 from the state where the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period during which the game shop staff can adjust the volume, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game shop side.

In addition, after the effect control board 130 side shifts to the setting confirmation mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the effect progress mode, that is, a command for significantly changing the display image of the image display device) is normally performed. At the timing of reception, the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) ends and the mode proceeds to the production progress mode (normal screen), so that it is possible to perform mode transition according to changes in the production control by the production control board 130. Become.

Also, at the timing of shifting from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) to the production progress mode (normal screen), it becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light amount by operating the cross key 19 (player). It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light amount while actually confirming the effect, and it is possible to provide an adjustment function that is kind to the player.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, 2 When the game ball is won in the starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50, and the second big winning opening 53), the winning is invalid and the payout of the gaming ball is not performed, and the payout according to the winning is made. Since the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because the number is not collected and is not included in the calculation of the normal base value, the game machine can be used only when the player can execute the game. Performance information (history information) can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, if the game ball flows into the outlet 39, this inflow occurs. It becomes invalid, the number of outs according to this inflow is not collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because it is not subject to calculation of the normal base value. Therefore, the player plays the game. It is possible to calculate, store, and display performance information (history information) of the gaming machine only when it is executable, and it is possible to provide accurate performance information.

In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power restoration designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When the game balls win the various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) while The payout of the game balls is made valid and the payout amount according to the prize is collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 is changed as the target for calculation of the normal base value. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine, even if the appearance mode is not the game progress mode (production progress mode), and provide accurate performance information. It becomes possible.

Moreover, the main control board 110 is in the game progress mode (game progress control) because the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the power supply restoration designation command, and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. If a game ball flows into the out port 39 while the player is present, this inflow becomes valid, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is collected and displayed on the information display 113 as a target for calculation of the normal base value. Since the normal base value may change, the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately calculated, stored, and displayed even if it is not in the game progression mode (production progression mode). It is possible to provide various performance information.

Further, when the main control board 110 is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are not executed (error specification command is not transmitted). When the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (production screen) is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are made. Since it is executed (error specification command is sent) and error notification becomes executable, useless processing is not performed in situations where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during the setting confirmation processing. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Moreover, the main control board 110 is in the game progress mode (game progress control) because the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the power supply restoration designation command, and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When it is, various error judgments are executed (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification is executed, so an error occurs even if it is not in the game progress mode (production progress mode) in appearance. Can be accurately notified. In this case, the display of the setting confirmation screen may be ended by shifting to the production progress mode, or the display of the setting confirmation screen may be maintained without shifting to the production progress mode.

Note that when the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) is shifted to the production progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount are adjusted by the operation of the cross key 19 (player) even if the power restoration notification is executed ( Instead of enabling the setting, the volume or light amount can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power recovery notification sound is finished. It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light amount by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when is completely finished.

Also, during the setting confirmation mode, even if the special symbol memory designation command or the start mouth winning designation command as the command before change is normally received, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but a special symbol memory designation command or start. You may make it shift to production progress mode at the timing which received the oral winning award designation command normally.

Further, even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the setting confirmation mode, it is not prevented from shifting to the effect progress mode, but may be shifted to the effect progress mode at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

Also, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is normally received, it shifts to the production progress mode and the normal screen (production screen) ) Is not displayed (the variation effect is started), the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the setting confirmation mode is continued and the setting confirmation screen is displayed. In this case, by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the opening designation command next, it is preferable to shift to the production progress mode and display the normal screen (production screen).

Further, the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the setting confirmation notification may be different from the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the power restoration notification. By doing so, it becomes easier to recognize which of the setting confirmation notification and the power restoration notification is being issued.

Also, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing), various error determinations (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error) are performed. In the case where it is executed, even if various errors occur and the error designation command is transmitted, the setting confirmation notification is maintained and the error notification is restricted (restricted) in the image display device. It is preferable to set the priority (importance) of the error notification to be lower (lower) than the setting confirmation notification.

In the present embodiment, a game is played using a game medium such as a game ball, and if a given condition is satisfied by the game, a predetermined amount of the game medium is awarded to the player as a prize. A game may be played using value data (game value) equivalent to, and a predetermined amount of value data (game value) may be awarded to the player as a prize when the award condition is satisfied by the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in the conventional game machine, a game machine that can give a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal, value data, etc.) according to the result of the game is general. Among such gaming machines, there has been a gaming machine that displays information indicating a set value (theoretical value) of the gaming machine performance on a display device (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-116898). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the gaming machine performance is predetermined and the game advantage cannot be changed.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a game. Specific information calculation means for collecting the game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) generated in 1. to calculate specific information (normal base value), and the specific information in the information display section (information display device). 113), specific information display means to be displayed, and transmission means for transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means at the start of the setting change state, the effect control means A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information, and the addition control unit is displaying the setting change image. When a game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings), the awarding control by the winning is not performed, and the specific information calculating means displays the setting change image. When the game medium is won in the winning area, the specific information is not calculated by the winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a game. Specific information calculating means for collecting the game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) to be generated and specific information (normal base value), and an information display section (information display device) for the specific information. 113), specific information display means to be displayed, and transmission means for transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means in response to the start of the setting change state, the effect control means The setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information, and the addition control unit displays the setting change image. When a game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings), the awarding control by the winning is not performed, and the specific information calculating means displays the setting change image. When the game medium is won in the winning area, the game information is not collected by the winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a grant control means (payout control board 120) that controls the granting of a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), and the game control means, setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) The winning determination means for determining whether or not the game medium (gaming ball, medal) has won, and the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. And a transmission unit that transmits the setting change image, and the effect control unit displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. Then, the game control means is configured to limit the execution of the prize determination when being controlled to the setting change state and to enable the execution of the prize determination after the end of the setting change state. There is. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means when the setting change state is started, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means when the setting change state is ended. ) Is transmitted, the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the first control information, and the second control information. If the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change image is not displayed even if the setting change state is ended. The display of the changed image is continued. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing the above, and the provision control means for performing the control of providing the game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on the provision information (command) transmitted from the game control means, The game control means controls the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and first controls the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. Transmitting information (setting change designation command), transmitting means for transmitting the second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and game information generated in the game (total out) Number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) to calculate specific information (normal base value), and specific information for displaying the specific information on the information display unit (information display 113). A display unit, and the effect control unit displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. The display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and when the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the setting change state has ended. Even if the setting change image is continuously displayed, the awarding control unit is in the setting change state and the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) is displayed while the setting changing image is being displayed. When a game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won, the awarding control by the winning is not performed and the game medium is displayed in the winning area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed. If a prize is won, the awarding control is performed by the prize, and the specific information calculating means is in the prize area when the setting change image is being displayed when the setting medium is being controlled. If a prize is won, the specific information is not calculated by the prize, and if the game medium wins in the winning area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed, The specific information is calculated by winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a grant control means (payout control board 120) that controls the granting of a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the effect with the start of the setting change state In the game, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the control means, and the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state. Specific information calculating means for collecting the generated game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) and calculating specific information (normal base value), and an information display unit (information display 113) for the specific information. ) Is displayed on the predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information, the setting control image (setting change screen). ) Is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and when the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, The setting change image continues to be displayed even if the change state has ended, and the grant control means controls the prize change area (various prizes) while the setting change image is being displayed when the setting change state is controlled. When a game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in the mouth, various starting mouths), the awarding control by the winning is not performed, and the setting change image is displayed after the setting change state ends. When the game medium is won in the winning area, the awarding control by the winning is performed, and the specific information calculating means is in the setting change state and is displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. When the game medium is won in the prize area, the game information is not collected by the prize, and the game medium is displayed in the prize area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed. When a prize is won, the game information is collected by the prize. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a grant control means (payout control board 120) for performing grant control of game benefits (prize balls, prize medals) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) The winning determination means for determining whether or not the game medium has won, and the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon the start of the setting change state, and the setting is performed. And a transmission means for transmitting second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control means upon completion of the changed state, the effect control means predetermined when the first control information is received. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the display unit (first image display device 70), the display of the setting change image is ended upon receipt of the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed. If the second control information is not received normally, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state has ended, and the game control means is controlled to the setting change state. During this time, the execution of the winning determination is restricted, and the execution of the winning determination is controlled after the setting change state is completed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means when the setting change state is started, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means when the setting change state is ended. ) Is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is a sound output section for effecting a game based on a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. (Voice output device 9) is provided with volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output to a predetermined volume, and is set on a predetermined display section (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. A change image (setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended upon receipt of the second control information, and the volume cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. Yes, after the display of the setting change image, the volume can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means when the setting change state is started, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means when the setting change state is ended. ) Is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is based on the light amount adjustment operation (the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) performed by the player, and the light emitting section for effecting the game ( The frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the backlight of the image display device) are provided with a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light to be emitted to a predetermined light amount. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the display section (first image display device 70) of the setting change display, the display of the setting change image is ended upon receipt of the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed. During display, the light amount cannot be set, and after the setting change image is displayed, the light amount can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted, and the effect control means is a sound output unit for effecting a game based on a volume adjustment operation by the player (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). Based on the sound volume setting means for setting the sound volume of the effect sound output from the (sound output device 9) to a predetermined sound volume and the light amount adjustment operation by the player (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19), And a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for causing the light emitting section (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, backlight of the image display device) for performing the light effect to be a predetermined light amount, A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon reception of the first control information, and the setting change image of the setting change image is displayed upon reception of the second control information. When the display is terminated and the setting change image is displayed, the volume and the light amount cannot be set, and after the setting change image is displayed, the volume and the light amount can be set. is there. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted, and the effect control means is a sound output unit for effecting a game based on a volume adjustment operation by the player (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). (Voice output device 9) is provided with volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output to a predetermined volume, and is set on a predetermined display section (first image display device 70) in response to reception of the first control information. A change image (setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the second control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed. If not, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state has ended, and the volume cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted, the effect control means is based on a light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) performed by the player, and the light emitting section for performing the effect of the game ( A frame amount illuminating device 10, a panel illuminating device 74, a backlight of the image display device) is provided with a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light to be a predetermined light amount, and the predetermined amount is set when the first control information is received. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the display section (first image display device 70) of the setting change display, the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed. When the second control information is not normally received during the display, the setting change image is continued to be displayed even if the setting change state is completed, and the light amount is set while the setting change image is being displayed. Is impossible. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted, and the effect control means is a sound output unit for effecting a game based on a volume adjustment operation by the player (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). Based on the sound volume setting means for setting the sound volume of the effect sound output from the (sound output device 9) to a predetermined sound volume and the light amount adjustment operation by the player (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19), And a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for causing the light emitting section (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, backlight of the image display device) for performing the light effect to be a predetermined light amount, A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon reception of the first control information, and the setting change image of the setting change image is displayed upon reception of the second control information. When the display is terminated and the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended, and the setting is changed. While the changed image is displayed, the volume and the light amount cannot be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a grant control means (payout control board 120) that controls the granting of a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and the start condition (winning of the game medium to the start opening ) Is established, variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the third control information (variation start to the effect control means upon start of variable display of the symbols. A transmitting means for transmitting a command), specific information calculating means for collecting specific game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) generated in the game and calculating specific information (normal base value), Specific information display means for displaying specific information on the information display section (information display unit 113), and the effect control means has a predetermined display section (first image display device) upon receipt of the first control information. 70) displaying a setting change image (setting change screen), ending the display of the setting change image upon receipt of the second control information, and displaying the predetermined display upon receipt of the third control information. If the second control information is not properly received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting is changed even if the setting change state is completed. The display of the changed image is continued, and when the setting control state is controlled, the addition control means displays the game medium in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting changing image is displayed. In the case where the game medium wins in the winning area after the setting change state is displayed and the setting change image is displayed, the awarding control is not performed due to the winning. When the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting information is controlled in the setting change state and the setting change image is displayed, The above-mentioned special If the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed after the setting change state is not calculated, the specific information is calculated by the winning. If the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information and normally receives the third control information while the setting change image is being displayed, the effect control means displays the setting change image. It is configured to end and start the variable display of the effect design. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control means (production control board 130) that performs the production control of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. , And the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (winning of a game medium into a starting opening). Based on the establishment, variable display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols), and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the setting is performed. The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the changed state, and the third control information (fluctuation start command) is sent to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols. And a specific information calculation unit that collects game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) generated in the game to calculate specific information (normal base value), and the specific information Specific information display means for displaying on the information display portion (information display device 113), the effect control means, upon receipt of the first control information, a predetermined display portion (first image display device 70). A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the display, the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the predetermined display unit is displayed with the reception of the third control information. When the variable display (variable effect) of the effect design is started and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change image is completed even if the setting change state is completed. Of the game medium (gaming ball) in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting change image is being displayed and when the setting change state is being controlled. , Medal) when the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting change state is displayed and the setting change image is displayed, without performing the giving control by the winning, Performing the awarding control by the winning, the specific information calculating means, when the game medium wins in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed and is being controlled to the setting change state, When the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed without calculating the specific information by the win, the winning of the specific information by the win Calculate the game control Means, after the end of the setting change state, when the start condition is satisfied during the display of the setting change image, start the variable display of the symbol, the effect control means, the second control information If the variable display of the symbol is started while the setting change image is displayed, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a grant control means (payout control board 120) that controls the granting of a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and the start condition (winning of the game medium to the start opening ) Is established, variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the third control information (variation start to the effect control means upon start of variable display of the symbols. A transmitting means for transmitting a command), specific information calculating means for collecting specific game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) generated in the game and calculating specific information (normal base value), Specific information display means for displaying specific information on the information display section (information display unit 113), and the effect control means has a predetermined display section (first image display device) upon receipt of the first control information. 70) displaying a setting change image (setting change screen), ending the display of the setting change image upon receipt of the second control information, and displaying the predetermined display upon receipt of the third control information. If the second control information is not properly received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting is changed even if the setting change state is completed. The display of the changed image is continued, and when the setting control state is controlled, the addition control means displays the game medium in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting changing image is displayed. In the case where the game medium wins in the winning area after the setting change state is displayed and the setting change image is displayed, the awarding control is not performed due to the winning. When the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting information is controlled in the setting change state and the setting change image is displayed, Is the play by the prize Without collecting the game information, when the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting change state and the setting change image is displayed, the game information is collected by the winning, If the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information and normally receives the third control information while the setting change image is being displayed, the effect control means displays the setting change image. It is configured to end and start the variable display of the effect design. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control means (production control board 130) that performs the production control of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) that controls the granting of a game privilege (prize ball, award medal) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means Based on the establishment of the setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) and the starting condition (winning of the game medium into the starting opening), the symbol (special symbol) Variable display means for performing variable display, and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means at the start of the setting change state, and the effect control is performed at the end of the setting change state. Transmitting the second control information (power-on designation command) to the means, transmitting means for transmitting the third control information (variation start command) to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols, and the game. Specific information calculating means for collecting game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) and calculating specific information (normal base value), and the specific information in the information display section (information display 113). Specific information display means for displaying the setting change image on the predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receipt of the first control information. Is displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated with the reception of the second control information, and the variable display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is displayed on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information. If the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the addition control means is provided. When the game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting changed image is being displayed when the setting is changed, If the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change state is not performed, the giving control by winning is not performed, and the giving control by the winning is performed, and The specific information calculating means collects the game information by the winning when the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting changed image is being displayed and the setting changed image is being displayed. Without changing the setting After the end and when the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed, the game information is collected by the winning, and the game control means, after the end of the setting change state. When the start condition is satisfied while the setting change image is being displayed, the variable display of the symbol is started, the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information, and the setting change is made. When the variable display of the symbol is started while displaying the image, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a grant control means (payout control board 120) that controls the granting of a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and the start condition (winning of the game medium to the start opening ) Is established, variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the third control information (variation start to the effect control means upon start of variable display of the symbols. And a winning determination means for determining whether or not a game medium (gaming ball, medal) has won in a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings). The production control means causes a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (setting change screen) upon receipt of the first control information, and upon receipt of the second control information. Then, the display of the setting change image is terminated, the variable display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the third control information, and while the setting change image is being displayed, 2 When the control information is not normally received, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the game control means is controlled to the setting change state. The execution of the prize determination is restricted, and the execution of the prize determination is controlled after completion of the setting change state, the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed. When the third control information is normally received while displaying, the display of the setting change image is ended and the variable display of the effect design is started. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control means (production control board 130) that performs the production control of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) that controls the granting of a game privilege (prize ball, award medal) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means, Based on the establishment of the setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) and the starting condition (winning of the game medium into the starting opening), the symbol (special symbol) Variable display means for performing variable display, and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means at the start of the setting change state, and the effect control is performed at the end of the setting change state. The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the means, and transmission means for transmitting the third control information (variation start command) to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols, and the winning area ( Various winning openings, various starting openings), and a winning determination means for performing a winning determination of whether or not a game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won, the effect control means, the effect control means receives the first control information The setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in accordance with the above, and the setting change image is ended upon receipt of the second control information. When the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information, and the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, , The setting change image is continued to be displayed even if the setting change state has ended, and the game control means restricts the execution of the winning determination when the setting change state is controlled to change the setting. After the end of the state, it is possible to control the execution of the winning determination, and if the start condition is satisfied during the display of the setting change image after the end of the setting change state, the variable display of the symbol is started. Then, the effect control means maintains the display of the setting change image when the variable display of the symbol is started without normally receiving the second control information. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and start. Based on the establishment of the condition (winning of the game medium to the starting opening), the variable display means for performing variable display of the symbol (special symbol), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the effect is effected with the start of variable display of the symbols. And a transmission means for transmitting the third control information (fluctuation start command) to the control means, wherein the effect control means is based on the player performing a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). , A volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the sound output section (voice output device 9) for performing the game effect to a predetermined volume, and a predetermined display upon receipt of the first control information. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the unit (first image display device 70 ), the display of the setting change image is ended upon reception of the second control information, and the third control information is received. Along with the above, the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit, and when the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state is The setting change image continues to be displayed even when the setting change image is displayed, the volume cannot be set while the setting change image is displayed, the second control information is not normally received, and the setting change is made. When the third control information is normally received while displaying the image, the display of the setting change image is ended, the variable display of the effect symbol is started, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After that, the volume can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and start. Based on the establishment of the condition (winning of the game medium to the starting opening), the variable display means for performing variable display of the symbol (special symbol), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the effect is effected with the start of variable display of the symbols. And a transmission means for transmitting third control information (fluctuation start command) to the control means, wherein the effect control means is based on a light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. , A light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for causing the light emitting section (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, backlight of the image display device) for performing the game effect to be a predetermined light amount, A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon reception of the first control information, and the setting change image is displayed upon reception of the second control information. Is ended, and the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information, and the second control information is normally set while the setting change image is being displayed. If it is not received, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state has ended, and the light amount cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. 2 If control information is not normally received and the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended and the effect symbol is changed. After the display is started and the variable display of the effect design is started, the light amount can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and start. Based on the establishment of the condition (winning of the game medium to the starting opening), the variable display means for performing variable display of the symbol (special symbol), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the effect is effected with the start of variable display of the symbols. And a transmission means for transmitting the third control information (fluctuation start command) to the control means, wherein the effect control means is based on the player performing a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). The volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit (audio output device 9) for effecting the game to a predetermined volume, and the light amount adjustment operation by the player (up/down button of the cross key 19). Based on the fact that there is an operation), the light amount of the effect light for causing the light emitting unit (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the backlight of the image display device) for performing the effect of the game to emit a predetermined light amount. A light amount setting means for setting, and a setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon reception of the first control information, and the second control is performed. The display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the information, and the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information. If the second control information is not normally received during the display, the setting change image continues to be displayed even if the setting change state has ended, and the volume and the When the light amount cannot be set, the second control information is not normally received, and the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is displayed, the setting is performed. The display of the changed image is terminated and the variable display of the effect symbol is started, and after the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the volume and the light amount can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, a game privilege (prize) based on a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and additional information (command) transmitted from the game control means. An award control unit (payout control board 120) for performing award control of a ball, a prize medal), and the game control unit includes a first information storage unit (main RAM 110c) for storing memory information associated with the progress control. , Setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined value stored in the first information storage means when the setting change state is ended. First initialization means for initializing storage information (information other than the setting value area of the game RWM area), and initialization by the giving control means in association with initialization of predetermined storage information of the first information storage means Initialization information transmission means for transmitting information (power-on designation command), the addition control means stores second information storage means (dispensing RAM 120c) for storing storage information associated with the addition control, and the initialization. When the information is received, a second initialization unit that initializes predetermined storage information (information other than the launch permission flag area of the RWM area) stored in the second information storage unit is provided. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a grant control for performing a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) grant control based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control board 120), the game control means, any one of a plurality of setting values (1-4), the first information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the storage information associated with the progress control. Setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to Crab, and predetermined storage information stored in the first information storage means when controlling the setting change state (other than the set value area of the game RWM area) Initialization information), and initialization for transmitting initialization information (power-on designation command) to the addition control means in association with initialization of predetermined storage information of the first information storage means. And a second information storage unit (payout RAM 120c) that stores storage information associated with the addition control, and the initialization control unit that stores the information in the second information storage unit. Second initialization means for initializing stored predetermined stored information (information other than the firing permission flag area of the RWM area). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game is provided, and the game control means stores information stored in association with the progress control. Means (main RAM 110c), setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and information stored in the information storage means when the setting change state is finished. Initializing means for initializing predetermined stored information (information other than the set value area of the game RWM area), wherein the information storing means initializes the stored information by the initializing means. There is one storage area (area other than the set value area of the game RWM area) and a second storage area (information area of the information RWM area) in which the storage information is not initialized by the initialization means. There is. Further, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means includes an information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the storage information associated with the progress control, and a plurality of set values ( Setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to any one of 1 to 4), and predetermined storage information (game RWM area of the game) stored in the information storage means when controlling the setting change state. Initializing means for initializing (information other than the set value area), the information storage means is a first storage area (set value area of the game RWM area) in which the stored information is initialized by the initializing means. Area) and a second storage area (information area of the information RWM area) in which the storage information is not initialized by the initialization means. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means is any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). Setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to, and game information (number of ordinary medium outs, number of ordinary medium payouts) generated in a game in a predetermined game section is collected to calculate specific information (normal base value) An information calculation unit and an information display unit for displaying the specific information on an information display unit (information display unit 113) are provided, and the information calculation unit, when the set value is changed in the predetermined game section. Is configured to calculate the specific information based on the game information of the game performed before the change and the game information of the game performed after the change. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means is any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). Setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to, and game information (number of ordinary medium outs, number of ordinary medium payouts) generated in a game in a predetermined game section is collected to calculate specific information (normal base value) The information calculation unit includes an information calculation unit and an information display unit that displays the specific information on the information display unit, and the information calculation unit is information that does not change due to a change in the set value (normal medium out number, normal medium payout) The number) is collected as the game information. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a predetermined Abnormality detection means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormality (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and the first effect control means for the effect control means with the start of the setting change state And a transmission unit that transmits control information (setting change designation command) and second control information (error designation command) in response to detection of the predetermined abnormality, wherein the effect control unit includes the first control. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon reception of the information, and an abnormality is notified on the predetermined display unit upon reception of the second control information. An image (illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.) is displayed, and the abnormality notification image is not displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. .. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a predetermined Abnormality determination means for determining the occurrence of abnormalities (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. And a transmission means for transmitting (setting change designation command) and second control information (error designation command) in response to occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. Upon reception, a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) displays a setting change image (setting change screen), and upon reception of the second control information, the predetermined display unit displays an abnormality notification image ( An illegal winning error image, an abnormal winning error image, a magnetic error image, a radio wave error image, a door opening error image, etc.) is displayed, and the game control means does not judge the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality in the setting change state. Has become. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control means (production control board 130) that performs the production control of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. , The game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined abnormality (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic Error determination means for determining the occurrence of an error, a radio wave error, a door opening error, etc.), and the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon the start of the setting change state, And a transmission unit that transmits second control information (error designation command) in response to the occurrence of the abnormality, the production control unit is configured to receive a predetermined display unit (first image) when the first control information is received. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the display device 70, and an abnormality notification image (illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error) is displayed on the predetermined display unit upon receipt of the second control information. Image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.), and the game control means is configured to be able to determine the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality in the setting change state, and the effect control means, the setting change image When the second control information is received while displaying, the setting change image is preferentially displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a predetermined Anomaly detection means for detecting the occurrence of anomalies (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and first to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. Control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted, second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and second detection information is detected upon detection of the predetermined abnormality. 3 transmission information for transmitting control information (error designation command), the effect control means, upon receipt of the first control information, a setting change image on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70). (Setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the abnormality notification image (on the predetermined display unit is displayed with the reception of the third control information). An illegal winning error image, an abnormal winning error image, a magnetic error image, a radio wave error image, a door opening error image, etc.) are displayed, and the abnormality notification image cannot be displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. After the display of the changed image is completed, the abnormality notification image can be displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a 27th configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a power supply. Initial processing means for executing initial processing (processing for power restoration) based on turning on, and first control information (setting change designation command) transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the third control information (power restoration specification command to the effect control means upon completion of the initial processing. ) Is transmitted, the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. Display, display a plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the second control information, and display a plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information , The plurality of effect symbols to be displayed with the reception of the second control information and the plurality of effect symbols to be displayed with the reception of the third control information are the same effect symbol (initial effect symbol "135"). ). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a power supply. Initial processing means for executing initial processing (processing for power restoration) based on turning on, and first control information (setting change designation command) transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the third control information (power restoration specification command to the effect control means upon completion of the initial processing. ) Is transmitted, the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. Display, display a plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the second control information, and display a plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information While displaying the plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit, one effect mode among a plurality of effect modes (effect modes A to G) is displayed, and the second control information is received. The effect mode displayed along with the effect and the effect mode displayed along with the reception of the third control information are the same effect mode (effect mode A). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a setting changing means for controlling to a setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) and a starting condition (game medium to a starting opening) Based on the establishment of the winning), it is determined whether to execute a first special game (small hit game) advantageous to the player or a second special game (big hit game) advantageous to the first special game. Means, based on the determination result of the determination means, variable display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols), and when it is determined to execute the first special game, the type of the first special game is determined. And a second deciding means for deciding the type of the second special game when it is decided to execute the second special game. The deciding means is set by the setting changing means. According to the set value determined, it is determined whether or not to execute the second special game (so that the jackpot winning probability is different), regardless of the set value set by the setting changing means, the first special Whether or not to execute the game is determined (so that the small hit winning probability is the same), and the second determining means is irrespective of the set value set by the setting changing means, of the first special game. It is designed to determine the type. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a thirtieth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a setting changing means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) and a starting condition (game medium to a starting opening) Based on the establishment of the winning), the determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means. The variation display means to be executed, and the determination means for determining the type of the special game when it is determined to execute the special game, the determination means, depending on the set value set by the setting change means Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game (so that the jackpot winning probability is different), and the type of the special game and the ratio for determining each special game are set to the setting values set by the setting changing means. It is the same regardless. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed according to the type of jackpot game (jackpot special symbol) and the gaming state at the time of jackpot, but all jackpot games After the end, the gaming machine may be shifted to the high-accuracy short time gaming state, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the gaming machine may be shifted to the low-probability non-time-short gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state. In this case, regardless of the set value, the number of times of the variable display executed in the high-accuracy short time gaming state may be the same, or the change for each set value so that the continuation rate of the high probability short time gaming state is the same. The number of times of display may be set.

In addition, after all jackpot games are over, transition to the high-probability game state, and if you win the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the variable display of special symbols in the high-probability game state, the high-probability game state is ended and normal It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

In addition, when a game ball passes through a specific area provided inside the special winning opening in a specific round game of the jackpot game, it shifts to a high-accuracy-time short game state after the jackpot game and the game ball passes through the specific area. If not, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to the low-probability time short gaming state after the jackpot game is over.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), but the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line by the game using the medal (game medium) as the gaming value (the grant condition is satisfied). Also, the present invention can be used for a spinning-roller type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) capable of giving a player a predetermined amount of prize medal. Furthermore, it can be used for a ball game machine and an arrangement ball game machine.

Further, it should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Gaming Machine 5 Gaming Board 44 Universal Drawing Gate 45 First Starting Port 47 Second Starting Port 50 First Big Winning Port 53 Second Big Winning Port 70 First Image Display 71 Second Image Display 110 Main Control Board 110a Main CPU
120 payout control board 130 production control board 130a sub CPU

Claims (1)

A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A payout control means for controlling the gaming value based on the satisfaction of the granting condition and controlling the gaming value for lending based on the satisfaction of the lending condition.
And a production control means for performing production control of a game based on control information transmitted from the game control means,
The game control means,
Setting changing means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values;
And initial processing means for performing an initial process of initializing the control state of based-out game to establishment of a predetermined condition at power,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display of symbols based on establishment of the start condition,
At the start of the setting change state, the first control information is transmitted to the effect control means, at the end of the setting change state, the second control information is transmitted to the effect control means, and at the end of the initial process. Accordingly, the third control information is transmitted to the effect control means, the fourth control information is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols, and the effect with the end of the variable display of the symbols. Transmission means for transmitting the fifth control information to the control means ,
The effect control means,
Display a setting change image on a predetermined display unit upon receipt of the first control information,
A plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the second control information,
With the reception of the third control information, a plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit,
With the reception of the fourth control information, a plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed on the predetermined display unit,
With the reception of the fifth control information, the variable display of a plurality of effect symbols is stopped and displayed,
Said plurality of performance symbol to be displayed along with the reception of the second control information, Ri same performance symbols der from said plurality of performance symbol which is displayed with the reception of the third control information,
By receiving the second control information while the setting change image is displayed, and then receiving the fifth control information while displaying the plurality of effect symbols started by receiving the fourth control information. The plurality of effect symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the second control information and the fourth control information cannot be normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, and then stopped by receiving the fifth control information. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to make different from the plurality of effect symbols to be displayed .